Merge commit 'qt/master'

Conflicts:
	doc/src/examples.qdoc
	doc/src/plugins-howto.qdoc
	doc/src/topics.qdoc
	examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp
	src/3rdparty/freetype/src/base/ftobjs.c
	src/corelib/global/qglobal.h
	src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.h
	src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp
	src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp
	src/corelib/tools/tools.pri
	src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.h
	src/gui/painting/painting.pri
	src/gui/widgets/qdatetimeedit.cpp
	tests/auto/qdesktopservices/qdesktopservices.pro
	tests/auto/qgraphicsitem/tst_qgraphicsitem.cpp
	tests/auto/qtextcodec/test/test.pro

15 files changed, 10512 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/focus.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/focus.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cbc71b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/focus.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page focus.html
+    \title Keyboard Focus
+    \brief Keyboard focus management and handling.
+    \ingroup frameworks-technologies
+
+    \keyword keyboard focus
+
+    Qt's widgets handle keyboard focus in the ways that have become
+    customary in GUIs. 
+
+    The basic issue is that the user's key strokes can be directed at any
+    of several windows on the screen, and any of several widgets inside
+    the intended window. When the user presses a key, they expect it to go
+    to the right place, and the software must try to meet this
+    expectation. The system must determine which application the key stroke
+    is directed at, which window within that application, and which widget
+    within that window.
+
+    \section1 Focus Motion
+
+    The customs which have evolved for directing keyboard focus to a
+    particular widget are these: 
+
+    \list 1
+
+    \o The user presses \key Tab (or \key Shift+Tab).
+    \o The user clicks a widget.
+    \o The user presses a keyboard shortcut.
+    \o The user uses the mouse wheel.
+    \o The user moves the focus to a window, and the application must
+       determine which widget within the window should get the focus.
+    \endlist
+
+    Each of these motion mechanisms is different, and different types of
+    widgets receive focus in only some of them. We'll cover each of them
+    in turn.
+
+    \section2 Tab or Shift+Tab
+
+    Pressing \key Tab is by far the most common way to move focus
+    using the keyboard. (Sometimes in data-entry applications Enter
+    does the same as \key{Tab}; this can easily be achieved in Qt by
+    implementing an \l{Events and Event Filters}{event filter}.)
+
+    Pressing \key Tab, in all window systems in common use today,
+    moves the keyboard focus to the next widget in a circular
+    per-window list. \key Tab moves focus along the circular list in
+    one direction, \key Shift+Tab in the other. The order in which
+    \key Tab presses move from widget to widget is called the tab order.
+
+    You can customize the tab order using QWidget::setTabOrder(). (If
+    you don't, \key Tab generally moves focus in the order of widget
+    construction.) \l{Qt Designer} provides a means of visually
+    changing the tab order.
+
+    Since pressing \key Tab is so common, most widgets that can have focus
+    should support tab focus. The major exception is widgets that are
+    rarely used, and where there is some keyboard accelerator or error
+    handler that moves the focus.
+
+    For example, in a data entry dialog, there might be a field that
+    is only necessary in one per cent of all cases. In such a dialog,
+    \key Tab could skip this field, and the dialog could use one of
+    these mechanisms: 
+
+    \list 1
+
+    \o If the program can determine whether the field is needed, it can
+    move focus there when the user finishes entry and presses \gui OK, or when
+    the user presses Enter after finishing the other fields. Alternately,
+    include the field in the tab order but disable it. Enable it if it
+    becomes appropriate in view of what the user has set in the other
+    fields.
+
+    \o The label for the field can include a keyboard shortcut that moves
+    focus to this field.
+
+    \endlist
+
+    Another exception to \key Tab support is text-entry widgets that
+    must support the insertion of tabs; almost all text editors fall
+    into this class. Qt treats \key Ctrl+Tab as \key Tab and \key
+    Ctrl+Shift+Tab as \key Shift+Tab, and such widgets can
+    reimplement QWidget::event() and handle Tab before calling
+    QWidget::event() to get normal processing of all other keys.
+    However, since some systems use \key Ctrl+Tab for other purposes,
+    and many users aren't aware of \key Ctrl+Tab anyway, this isn't a
+    complete solution.
+
+    \section2 The User Clicks a Widget
+
+    This is perhaps even more common than pressing \key Tab on
+    computers with a mouse or other pointing device.
+
+    Clicking to move the focus is slightly more powerful than \key
+    Tab. While it moves the focus \e to a widget, for editor widgets
+    it also moves the text cursor (the widget's internal focus) to
+    the spot where the mouse is clicked.
+
+    Since it is so common and people are used to it, it's a good idea to
+    support it for most widgets. However, there is also an important
+    reason to avoid it: you may not want to remove focus from the widget
+    where it was.
+
+    For example, in a word processor, when the user clicks the 'B' (bold)
+    tool button, what should happen to the keyboard focus? Should it
+    remain where it was, almost certainly in the editing widget, or should
+    it move to the 'B' button?
+
+    We advise supporting click-to-focus for widgets that support text
+    entry, and to avoid it for most widgets where a mouse click has a
+    different effect. (For buttons, we also recommend adding a keyboard
+    shortcut: QAbstractButton and its subclasses make this very easy.)
+
+    In Qt, only the QWidget::setFocusPolicy() function affects
+    click-to-focus.
+
+    \section2 The User Presses a Keyboard Shortcut
+
+    It's not unusual for keyboard shortcuts to move the focus. This
+    can happen implicitly by opening modal dialogs, but also
+    explicitly using focus accelerators such as those provided by
+    QLabel::setBuddy(), QGroupBox, and QTabBar.
+
+    We advise supporting shortcut focus for all widgets that the user
+    may want to jump to. For example, a tab dialog can have keyboard
+    shortcuts for each of its pages, so the user can press e.g. \key
+    Alt+P to step to the \underline{P}rinting page. It is easy to
+    overdo this: there are only a few keys, and it's also important
+    to provide keyboard shortcuts for commands. \key Alt+P is also
+    used for Paste, Play, Print, and Print Here in the \l{Standard
+    Accelerator Keys} list, for example.
+
+    \section2 The User Rotates the Mouse Wheel
+
+    On Microsoft Windows, mouse wheel usage is always handled by the
+    widget that has keyboard focus. On Mac OS X and X11, it's handled by
+    the widget that gets other mouse events.
+
+    The way Qt handles this platform difference is by letting widgets move
+    the keyboard focus when the wheel is used. With the right focus policy
+    on each widget, applications can work idiomatically correctly on
+    Windows, Mac OS X, and X11.
+
+    \section2 The User Moves the Focus to This Window
+
+    In this situation the application must determine which widget within
+    the window should receive the focus.
+
+    This can be simple: If the focus has been in this window before,
+    then the last widget to have focus should regain it. Qt does this
+    automatically.
+
+    If focus has never been in this window before and you know where
+    focus should start out, call QWidget::setFocus() on the widget
+    which should receive focus before you call QWidget::show() it. If
+    you don't, Qt will pick a suitable widget.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-cde.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-cde.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02dabb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-cde.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-cde.html
+
+  \title CDE Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "cde" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cde-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-cleanlooks.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-cleanlooks.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13c0f8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-cleanlooks.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-cleanlooks.html
+
+  \title Cleanlooks Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "cleanlooks" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage cleanlooks-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-gtk.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-gtk.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8251f04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-gtk.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+/*!
+  \page gallery-gtk.html
+
+  \title GTK Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "gtk" style.
+
+  Take a look at the \l{Qt Widget Gallery} to see how Qt
+  applications appear in other styles.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage gtk-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-macintosh.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-macintosh.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7efabe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-macintosh.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-macintosh.html
+
+  \title Macintosh Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "macintosh" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage macintosh-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-motif.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-motif.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1539753
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-motif.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-motif.html
+
+  \title Motif Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "motif" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage motif-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-plastique.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-plastique.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49bd13e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-plastique.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-plastique.html
+
+  \title Plastique Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "plastique" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage plastique-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windows.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windows.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fa971c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windows.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-windows.html
+
+  \title Windows Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "windows" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windows-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windowsvista.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windowsvista.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ab3a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windowsvista.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-windowsvista.html
+
+  \title Windows Vista Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "windowsvista" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsvista-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windowsxp.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windowsxp.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aefff65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery-windowsxp.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \page gallery-windowsxp.html
+
+  \title Windows XP Style Widget Gallery
+  \ingroup gallery
+
+  This page shows some of the widgets available in Qt
+  when configured to use the "windowsxp" style.
+
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Buttons</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-pushbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-toolbutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QPushButton widget provides a command button.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands
+       or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-checkbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-radiobutton.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Containers</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-groupbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-tabwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-frame.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-toolbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFrame widget provides a simple decorated container for other widgets.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Item Views</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-listview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-treeview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QListView class provides a default model/view implementation of a list/icon view. The QListWidget class provides a classic item-based list/icon view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation of a tree view. The QTreeWidget class provides a classic item-based tree view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-tableview.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTableView class provides a default model/view implementation of a table view. The QTableWidget class provides a classic item-based table view.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Display Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-progressbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-lcdnumber.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-label.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLabel widget provides a text or image display.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+\raw HTML
+<h2 align="center">Input Widgets</h2>
+
+<table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+<colgroup span="2">
+  <col width="40%" />
+  <col width="40%" />
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-slider.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-lineedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-combobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-doublespinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QComboBox widget is a combined button and pop-up list.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDoubleSpinBox class provides a spin box widget that allows double precision floating point numbers to be entered.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-spinbox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-timeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-dateedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-datetimeedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateEdit class provides a widget for editing dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-textedit.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-horizontalscrollbar.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and
+     display both plain and rich text.\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. Here, we show a scroll bar with horizontal orientation.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-dial.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-calendarwidget.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a
+       speedometer or potentiometer).\raw HTML
+</td>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly calendar widget that can be used to select dates.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="center">
+\endraw
+\inlineimage windowsxp-fontcombobox.png
+\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td halign="justify" valign="top">
+\endraw
+The QFontComboBox widget is a specialized combobox that enables fonts to be selected from a pop-up list containing previews of available fonts.\raw HTML
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+\endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb92cb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/gallery.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \group gallery
+  \title Qt Widget Gallery
+  \brief Qt widgets shown in different styles on various platforms.
+
+  Qt's support for widget styles and themes enables your application to fit in
+  with the native desktop enviroment. Below, you can find links to the various
+  widget styles that are supplied with Qt 4.
+
+  \raw HTML
+  <table align="center" cellspacing="20%" width="100%">
+  <colgroup span="2">
+    <col width="40%" />
+    <col width="40%" />
+  </colgroup>
+  <tr>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image plastique-tabwidget.png Plastique Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Plastique Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Plastique style is provided by QPlastiqueStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image windowsxp-tabwidget.png Windows XP Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Windows XP Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Windows XP style is provided by QWindowsXPStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image gtk-tabwidget.png GTK Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{GTK Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The GTK style is provided by QGtkStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image macintosh-tabwidget.png Macintosh Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Macintosh Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Macintosh style is provided by QMacStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image cleanlooks-tabwidget.png Cleanlooks Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Cleanlooks Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Cleanlooks style is provided by QCleanlooksStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image windowsvista-tabwidget.png Windows Vista Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Windows Vista Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Windows Vista style is provided by QWindowsVistaStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image motif-tabwidget.png Motif Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Motif Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Motif style is provided by QMotifStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image windows-tabwidget.png Windows Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{Windows Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Windows style is provided by QWindowsStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+  <td align="center">
+  \endraw
+  \image cde-tabwidget.png CDE Style Widget Gallery
+
+  \bold{\l{CDE Style Widget Gallery}}
+
+  The Common Desktop Environment style is provided by QCDEStyle.
+  \raw HTML
+  </td>
+  </tr>
+  </table>
+  \endraw
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/layout.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/layout.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4622301
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/layout.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \group geomanagement
+    \title Layout Classes
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \page layout.html
+    \title Layout Management
+    \brief A tour of the standard layout managers and an introduction to custom
+    layouts.
+    
+    \previouspage Widget Classes
+    \contentspage Widgets and Layouts
+    \nextpage {Implementing Styles and Style Aware Widgets}{Styles}
+
+    \ingroup frameworks-technologies
+
+    The Qt layout system provides a simple and powerful way of automatically
+    arranging child widgets within a widget to ensure that they make good use
+    of the available space.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Introduction
+
+    Qt includes a set of layout management classes that are used to describe
+    how widgets are laid out in an application's user interface. These layouts
+    automatically position and resize widgets when the amount of space
+    available for them changes, ensuring that they are consistently arranged
+    and that the user interface as a whole remains usable.
+
+    All QWidget subclasses can use layouts to manage their children. The
+    QWidget::setLayout() function applies a layout to a widget. When a layout
+    is set on a widget in this way, it takes charge of the following tasks:
+
+    \list
+    \o Positioning of child widgets.
+    \o Sensible default sizes for windows.
+    \o Sensible minimum sizes for windows.
+    \o Resize handling.
+    \o Automatic updates when contents change:
+        \list
+        \o Font size, text or other contents of child widgets.
+        \o Hiding or showing a child widget.
+        \o Removal of child widgets.
+        \endlist
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 Qt's Layout Classes
+    
+    Qt's layout classes were designed for hand-written C++ code, allowing
+    measurements to be specified in pixels for simplicity, so they are easy to
+    understand and use. The code generated for forms created using \QD also
+    uses the layout classes. \QD is useful to use when experimenting with the
+    design of a form since it avoids the compile, link and run cycle usually
+    involved in user interface development.
+
+    \annotatedlist geomanagement
+
+    \section1 Horizontal, Vertical, Grid, and Form Layouts
+
+    The easiest way to give your widgets a good layout is to use the built-in
+    layout managers: QHBoxLayout, QVBoxLayout, QGridLayout, and QFormLayout.
+    These classes inherit from QLayout, which in turn derives from QObject (not
+    QWidget). They take care of geometry  management for a set of widgets. To
+    create more complex layouts, you can nest layout managers inside each other.
+
+    \list
+        \o  A QHBoxLayout lays out widgets in a horizontal row, from left to
+            right (or right to left for right-to-left languages).
+            \image qhboxlayout-with-5-children.png
+
+        \o  A QVBoxLayout lays out widgets in a vertical column, from top to
+            bottom.
+            \image qvboxlayout-with-5-children.png
+
+        \o  A QGridLayout lays out widgets in a two-dimensional grid. Widgets
+            can occupy multiple cells.
+            \image qgridlayout-with-5-children.png
+
+        \o  A QFormLayout lays out widgets in a 2-column descriptive label-
+            field style.
+            \image qformlayout-with-6-children.png
+    \endlist
+
+
+    \section2 Laying Out Widgets in Code
+
+    The following code creates a QHBoxLayout that manages the geometry of five
+    \l{QPushButton}s, as shown on the first screenshot above:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 0
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 1
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 3
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 4
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 5
+
+    The code for QVBoxLayout is identical, except the line where the layout is
+    created. The code for QGridLayout is a bit different, because we need to
+    specify the row and column position of the child widget:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 12
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 13
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 14
+    \codeline
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 15
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 16
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/layouts/layouts.cpp 17
+
+    The third QPushButton spans 2 columns. This is possible by specifying 2 as
+    the fifth argument to QGridLayout::addWidget().
+
+    Finally, the code for QFormLayout is ..
+
+
+    \section2 Tips for Using Layouts
+
+    When you use a layout, you do not need to pass a parent when constructing
+    the child widgets. The layout will automatically reparent the widgets
+    (using QWidget::setParent()) so that they are children of the widget on
+    which the layout is installed.
+
+    \note Widgets in a layout are children of the widget on which the layout
+    is installed, \e not of the layout itself. Widgets can only have other
+    widgets as parent, not layouts.
+
+    You can nest layouts using \c addLayout() on a layout; the inner layout
+    then becomes a child of the layout it is inserted into.
+
+
+    \section1 Adding Widgets to a Layout
+
+    When you add widgets to a layout, the layout process works as follows:
+
+    \list 1
+        \o  All the widgets will initially be allocated an amount of space in
+            accordance with their QWidget::sizePolicy() and
+            QWidget::sizeHint().
+
+        \o  If any of the widgets have stretch factors set, with a value
+            greater than zero, then they are allocated space in proportion to
+            their stretch factor (explained below).
+
+        \o  If any of the widgets have stretch factors set to zero they will
+            only get more space if no other widgets want the space. Of these,
+            space is allocated to widgets with an
+            \l{QSizePolicy::Expanding}{Expanding} size policy first.
+
+        \o  Any widgets that are allocated less space than their minimum size
+            (or minimum size hint if no minimum size is specified) are
+            allocated this minimum size they require. (Widgets don't have to
+            have a minimum size or minimum size hint in which case the strech
+            factor is their determining factor.)
+
+        \o  Any widgets that are allocated more space than their maximum size
+            are allocated the maximum size space they require. (Widgets do not
+            have to have a maximum size in which case the strech factor is
+            their determining factor.)
+    \endlist
+
+
+    \section2 Stretch Factors
+    \keyword stretch factor
+
+    Widgets are normally created without any stretch factor set. When they are
+    laid out in a layout the widgets are given a share of space in accordance
+    with their QWidget::sizePolicy() or their minimum size hint whichever is
+    the greater. Stretch factors are used to change how much space widgets are
+    given in proportion to one another.
+
+    If we have three widgets laid out using a QHBoxLayout with no stretch
+    factors set we will get a layout like this:
+
+    \img layout1.png Three widgets in a row
+
+    If we apply stretch factors to each widget, they will be laid out in
+    proportion (but never less than their minimum size hint), e.g.
+
+    \img layout2.png Three widgets with different stretch factors in a row
+
+
+    \section1 Custom Widgets in Layouts
+
+    When you make your own widget class, you should also communicate its layout
+    properties. If the widget has a one of Qt's layouts, this is already taken
+    care of. If the widget does not have any child widgets, or uses manual
+    layout, you can change the behavior of the widget using any or all of the
+    following mechanisms:
+
+    \list
+        \o  Reimplement QWidget::sizeHint() to return the preferred size of the
+            widget.
+        \o  Reimplement QWidget::minimumSizeHint() to return the smallest size
+            the widget can have.
+        \o  Call QWidget::setSizePolicy() to specify the space requirements of
+            the widget.
+    \endlist
+
+    Call QWidget::updateGeometry() whenever the size hint, minimum size hint or
+    size policy changes. This will cause a layout recalculation. Multiple
+    consecutive calls to QWidget::updateGeometry() will only cause one layout
+    recalculation.
+
+    If the preferred height of your widget depends on its actual width (e.g.,
+    a label with automatic word-breaking), set the
+    \l{QSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth()}{height-for-width} flag in the
+    widget's \l{QWidget::sizePolicy}{size policy} and reimplement
+    QWidget::heightForWidth().
+
+    Even if you implement QWidget::heightForWidth(), it is still a good idea to
+    provide a reasonable sizeHint().
+
+    For further guidance when implementing these functions, see the
+    \e{Qt Quarterly} article
+    \l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/qq/qq04-height-for-width.html}
+    {Trading Height for Width}.
+
+
+    \section1 Layout Issues
+
+    The use of rich text in a label widget can introduce some problems to the
+    layout of its parent widget. Problems occur due to the way rich text is
+    handled by Qt's layout managers when the label is word wrapped.
+
+    In certain cases the parent layout is put into QLayout::FreeResize mode,
+    meaning that it will not adapt the layout of its contents to fit inside
+    small sized windows, or even prevent the user from making the window too
+    small to be usable. This can be overcome by subclassing the problematic
+    widgets, and implementing suitable \l{QWidget::}{sizeHint()} and
+    \l{QWidget::}{minimumSizeHint()} functions.
+
+    In some cases, it is relevant when a layout is added to a widget. When
+    you set the widget of a QDockWidget or a QScrollArea (with
+    QDockWidget::setWidget() and QScrollArea::setWidget()), the layout must
+    already have been set on the widget. If not, the widget will not be
+    visible.
+
+
+    \section1 Manual Layout
+
+    If you are making a one-of-a-kind special layout, you can also make a
+    custom widget as described above. Reimplement QWidget::resizeEvent() to
+    calculate the required distribution of sizes and call
+    \l{QWidget::}{setGeometry()} on each child.
+
+    The widget will get an event of type QEvent::LayoutRequest when the
+    layout needs to be recalculated. Reimplement QWidget::event() to handle
+    QEvent::LayoutRequest events.
+
+
+    \section1 How to Write A Custom Layout Manager
+
+    An alternative to manual layout is to write your own layout manager by
+    subclassing QLayout. The \l{layouts/borderlayout}{Border Layout} and
+    \l{layouts/flowlayout}{Flow Layout} examples show how to do this.
+
+    Here we present an example in detail. The \c CardLayout class is inspired
+    by the Java layout manager of the same name. It lays out the items (widgets
+    or nested layouts) on top of each other, each item offset by
+    QLayout::spacing().
+
+    To write your own layout class, you must define the following:
+    \list
+        \o  A data structure to store the items handled by the layout. Each
+            item is a \link QLayoutItem QLayoutItem\endlink. We will use a
+            QList in this example.
+        \o  \l{QLayout::}{addItem()}, how to add items to the layout.
+        \o  \l{QLayout::}{setGeometry()}, how to perform the layout.
+        \o  \l{QLayout::}{sizeHint()}, the preferred size of the layout.
+        \o  \l{QLayout::}{itemAt()}, how to iterate over the layout.
+        \o  \l{QLayout::}{takeAt()}, how to remove items from the layout.
+    \endlist
+
+    In most cases, you will also implement \l{QLayout::}{minimumSize()}.
+
+
+    \section2 The Header File (\c card.h)
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 0
+
+
+    \section2 The Implementation File (\c card.cpp)
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 1
+
+    First we define \c{count()} to fetch the number of items in the list.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 2
+
+    Then we define two functions that iterate over the layout: \c{itemAt()}
+    and \c{takeAt()}. These functions are used internally by the layout system
+    to handle deletion of widgets. They are also available for application
+    programmers. 
+
+    \c{itemAt()} returns the item at the given index. \c{takeAt()} removes the
+    item at the given index, and returns it. In this case we use the list index
+    as the layout index. In other cases where we have a more complex data
+    structure, we may have to spend more effort defining a linear order for the
+    items.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 3
+
+    \c{addItem()} implements the default placement strategy for layout items.
+    This function must be implemented. It is used by QLayout::add(), by the
+    QLayout constructor that takes a layout as parent. If your layout has
+    advanced placement options that require parameters, you must provide extra
+    access functions such as the row and column spanning overloads of
+    QGridLayout::addItem(), QGridLayout::addWidget(), and
+    QGridLayout::addLayout().
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 4
+
+    The layout takes over responsibility of the items added. Since QLayoutItem
+    does not inherit QObject, we must delete the items manually. In the 
+    destructor, we remove each item from the list using \c{takeAt()}, and
+    then delete it.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 5
+
+    The \c{setGeometry()} function actually performs the layout. The rectangle
+    supplied as an argument does not include \c{margin()}. If relevant, use
+    \c{spacing()} as the distance between items.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 6
+
+    \c{sizeHint()} and \c{minimumSize()} are normally very similar in
+    implementation. The sizes returned by both functions should include
+    \c{spacing()}, but not \c{margin()}.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_layout.qdoc 7
+
+
+    \section2 Further Notes
+
+    \list
+        \o  This custom layout does not handle height for width.
+        \o  We ignore QLayoutItem::isEmpty(); this means that the layout will
+            treat hidden widgets as visible.
+        \o  For complex layouts, speed can be greatly increased by caching
+            calculated values. In that case, implement
+            QLayoutItem::invalidate() to mark the cached data is dirty.
+        \o  Calling QLayoutItem::sizeHint(), etc. may be expensive. So, you
+            should store the value in a local variable if you need it again
+            later within in the same function.
+        \o  You should not call QLayoutItem::setGeometry() twice on the same
+            item in the same function. This call can be very expensive if the
+            item has several child widgets, because the layout manager must do
+            a complete layout every time. Instead, calculate the geometry and
+            then set it. (This does not only apply to layouts, you should do
+            the same if you implement your own resizeEvent(), for example.)
+    \endlist
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/styles.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/styles.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa51838
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/styles.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,2123 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \group appearance
+    \title Widget Appearance and Style
+    \brief Classes used for customizing UI appearance and style.
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \page style-reference.html
+    \title Implementing Styles and Style Aware Widgets
+    \brief An overview of styles and the styling of widgets.
+
+    \ingroup frameworks-technologies
+
+    \previouspage Widget Classes
+    \contentspage Widgets and Layouts
+    \nextpage {Qt Style Sheets}{Style sheets}
+
+    Styles (classes that inherit QStyle) draw on behalf of widgets
+    and encapsulate the look and feel of a GUI. The QStyle class is
+    an abstract base class that encapsulates the look and feel of a
+    GUI. Qt's built-in widgets use it to perform nearly all of their
+    drawing, ensuring that they look exactly like the equivalent
+    native widgets.
+
+    Several styles are built into Qt (e.g., windows style and motif style).
+    Other styles are only available on specific platforms (such as
+    the windows XP style). Custom styles are made available as plugins
+    or by creating an instance of the style class in an application and
+    setting it with QApplication::setStyle().
+
+    To implement a new style, you inherit one of Qt's existing styles
+    - the one most resembling the style you want to create - and
+    reimplement a few virtual functions. This process is somewhat
+    involved, and we therefore provide this overview. We give a
+    step-by-step walkthrough of how to style individual Qt widgets.
+    We will examine the QStyle virtual functions, member variables,
+    and enumerations.
+
+    The part of this document that does not concern the styling of
+    individual widgets is meant to be read sequentially because later
+    sections tend to depend on earlier ones. The description of the
+    widgets can be used for reference while implementing a style.
+    However, you may need to consult the Qt source code in some cases.
+    The sequence in the styling process should become clear after
+    reading this document, which will aid you in locating relevant code.
+
+    To develop style aware widgets (i.e., widgets that conform to
+    the style in which they are drawn), you need to draw them using the
+    current style. This document shows how widgets draw themselves
+    and which possibilities the style gives them.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Classes for Widget Styling
+
+    These classes are used to customize an application's appearance and
+    style.
+
+    \annotatedlist appearance
+
+    \section1 The QStyle implementation
+
+    The API of QStyle contains functions that draw the widgets, static
+    helper functions to do common and difficult tasks (e.g.,
+    calculating the position of slider handles) and functions to do
+    the various calculations necessary while drawing (e.g., for the
+    widgets to calculate their size hints). The style also help some
+    widgets with the layout of their contents. In addition, it creates
+    a QPalette that contains \l{QBrush}es to draw with.
+
+    QStyle draws graphical elements; an element is a widget or a
+    widget part like a push button bevel, a window frame, or a scroll
+    bar. Most draw functions now take four arguments:
+
+    \list
+    \o an enum value specifying which graphical element to draw
+    \o a QStyleOption specifying how and where to render that element
+    \o a QPainter that should be used to draw the element
+    \o a QWidget on which the drawing is performed (optional)
+    \endlist
+
+    When a widget asks a style to draw an element, it provides the style
+    with a QStyleOption, which is a class that contains the information
+    necessary for drawing. Thanks to QStyleOption, it is possible to make
+    QStyle draw widgets without linking in any code for the widget. This
+    makes it possible to use \l{QStyle}'s draw functions on any paint
+    device. Ie you can draw a combobox on any widget, not just on a
+    QComboBox.
+
+    The widget is passed as the last argument in case the style needs
+    it to perform special effects (such as animated default buttons on
+    Mac OS X), but it isn't mandatory.
+
+    We will in the course of this section look at the style elements,
+    the style options, and the functions of QStyle. Finally, we describe
+    how the palette is used.
+
+    Items in item views is drawn by \l{Delegate Classes}{delegates} in
+    Qt. The item view headers are still drawn by the style. Qt's
+    default delegate, QStyledItemDelegate, draws its items partially
+    through the current style; it draws the check box indicators and
+    calculate bounding rectangles for the elements of which the item
+    consists. In this document, we only describe how to implement a
+    QStyle subclass. If you wish to add support for other datatypes
+    than those supported by the QStyledItemDelegate, you need to
+    implement a custom delegate. Note that delegates must be set
+    programmatically for each individual widget (i.e., default
+    delegates cannot be provided as plugins).
+
+    \section2 The Style Elements
+
+    A style element is a graphical part of a GUI. A widget consists
+    of a hierarchy (or tree) of style elements. For instance, when a
+    style receives a request to draw a push button (from QPushButton,
+    for example), it draws a label (text and icon), a button bevel,
+    and a focus frame. The button bevel, in turn, consists of a frame
+    around the bevel and two other elements, which we will look at
+    later. Below is a conceptual illustration of the push button
+    element tree. We will see the actual tree for QPushButton when we
+    go through the individual widgets.
+
+    \image javastyle/conceptualpushbuttontree.png
+
+    Widgets are not necessarily drawn by asking the style to draw
+    only one element. Widgets can make several calls to the style to
+    draw different elements. An example is QTabWidget, which draws its
+    tabs and frame individually.
+
+    There are three element types: primitive elements, control
+    elements, and complex control elements. The elements are defined
+    by the \l{QStyle::}{ComplexControl}, \l{QStyle::}{ControlElement},
+    and \l{QStyle::}{PrimitiveElement} enums. The values of
+    each element enum has a prefix to identify their type: \c{CC_} for
+    complex elements, \c{CE_} for control elements, and \c{PE_} for
+    primitive elements. We will in the following three sections see what
+    defines the different elements and see examples of widgets that use
+    them.
+
+    The QStyle class description contains a list of these elements and
+    their roles in styling widgets. We will see how they are used when
+    we style individual widgets.
+
+    \section3 Primitive Elements
+
+    Primitive elements are GUI elements that are common and often used
+    by several widgets. Examples of these are frames, button bevels,
+    and arrows for spin boxes, scroll bars, and combo boxes.
+    Primitive elements cannot exist on their own: they are always part
+    of a larger construct. They take no part in the interaction with
+    the user, but are passive decorations in the GUI.
+
+    \section3 Control Elements
+
+    A control element performs an action or displays information
+    to the user. Examples of control elements are push buttons, check
+    boxes, and header sections in tables and tree views. Control
+    elements are not necessarily complete widgets such as push
+    buttons, but can also be widget parts such as tab bar tabs and
+    scroll bar sliders. They differ from primitive elements in that
+    they are not passive, but fill a function in the interaction with
+    the user. Controls that consist of several elements often use the
+    style to calculate the bounding rectangles of the elements. The
+    available sub elements are defined by the \l{QStyle::}{SubElement}
+    enum. This enum is only used for calculating bounding rectangles,
+    and sub elements are as such not graphical elements to be drawn
+    like primitive, control, and complex elements.
+
+    \section3 Complex Control Elements
+
+    Complex control elements contain sub controls. Complex controls
+    behave differently depending on where the user handles them with
+    the mouse and which keyboard keys are pressed. This is dependent
+    on which sub control (if any) that the mouse is over or received a
+    mouse press. Examples of complex controls are scroll bars and
+    combo boxes. With a scroll bar, you can use the mouse to move the
+    slider and press the line up and line down buttons. The available
+    sub controls are defined by the \l{QStyle}{SubControl} enum.
+
+    In addition to drawing, the style needs to provide the widgets
+    with information on which sub control (if any) a mouse press was
+    made on. For instance, a QScrollBar needs to know if the user
+    pressed the slider, the slider groove, or one of the buttons.
+
+    Note that sub controls are not the same as the control elements
+    described in the previous section. You cannot use the style to
+    draw a sub control; the style will only calculate the bounding
+    rectangle in which the sub control should be drawn. It is common,
+    though, that complex elements use control and primitive elements
+    to draw their sub controls, which is an approach that is
+    frequently used by the built-in styles in Qt and also the Java
+    style. For instance, the Java style uses PE_IndicatorCheckBox to
+    draw the check box in group boxes (which is a sub control of
+    CC_GroupBox). Some sub controls have an equivalent control element,
+    e.g., the scroll bar slider (SC_SCrollBarSlider and
+    CE_ScrollBarSlider).
+
+    \section3 Other QStyle Tasks
+
+    The style elements and widgets, as mentioned, use the style to
+    calculate bounding rectangles of sub elements and sub controls,
+    and pixel metrics, which is a style dependent size in screen
+    pixels, for measures when drawing. The available rectangles and
+    pixel metrics are represented by three enums in QStyle:
+    \l{QStyle::}{SubElement}, \l{QStyle::}{SubControl}, and
+    \l{QStyle::}{PixelMetric}. Values of the enums can easily by
+    identified as they start with SE_, SC_ and PM_.
+
+    The style also contain a set of style hints, which is
+    represented as values in the \l{QStyle::}{StyleHint} enum. All
+    widgets do not have the same functionality and look in the
+    different styles. For instance, when the menu items in a menu do not
+    fit in a single column on the screen, some styles support
+    scrolling while others draw more than one column to fit all items.
+
+    A style usually has a set of standard images (such as a warning, a
+    question, and an error image) for message boxes, file dialogs,
+    etc. QStyle provides the \l{QStyle::}{StandardPixmap} enum. Its
+    values represent the standard images. Qt's widgets use these, so
+    when you implement a custom style you should supply the images
+    used by the style that is being implemented.
+
+    The style calculates the spacing between widgets in layouts. There
+    are two ways the style can handle these calculations. You can set
+    the PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing and PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing, which
+    is the way the java style does it (through QCommonStyle).
+    Alternatively, you can implement QStyle::layoutSpacing() and
+    QStyle::layoutSpacingImplementation() if you need more control over 
+    this part of the layout. In these functions you can calculate the
+    spacing based on control types (QSizePolicy::ControlType) for
+    different size policies (QSizePolicy::Policy) and also the style
+    option for the widget in question.
+
+    \section2 Style Options
+
+    The sub-classes of QStyleOption contain all information necessary
+    to style the individual elements. Style options are instantiated - 
+    usually on the stack - and filled out by the caller of the QStyle
+    function. Depending on what is drawn the style will expect
+    different a different style option class. For example, the
+    QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect element expects a QStyleOptionFocusRect
+    argument, and it's possible to create custom subclasses that a
+    custom style can use. The style options keep public variables
+    for performance reasons.
+
+    The widgets can be in a number of different states, which are
+    defined by the \l{QStyle::}{State} enum. Some of the state flags have
+    different meanings depending on the widget, but others are common
+    for all widgets like State_Disabled. It is QStyleOption that sets
+    the common states with QStyleOption::initFrom(); the rest of the
+    states are set by the individual widgets.
+
+    Most notably, the style options contain the palette and bounding
+    rectangles of the widgets to be drawn. Most widgets have
+    specialized style options. QPushButton and QCheckBox, for
+    instance, use QStyleOptionButton as style option, which contain
+    the text, icon, and the size of their icon. The exact contents of
+    all options are described when we go through individual widgets.
+
+    When reimplementing QStyle functions that take a
+    QStyleOption parameter, you often need to cast the
+    QStyleOption to a subclass (e.g., QStyleOptionFocusRect). For
+    safety, you can use qstyleoption_cast() to ensure that the
+    pointer type is correct. If the object isn't of the right type,
+    qstyleoption_cast() returns 0. For example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qt4-styles.qdoc 0
+
+    The following code snippet illustrates how to use QStyle to
+    draw the focus rectangle from a custom widget's paintEvent():
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qt4-styles.qdoc 1
+
+    The next example shows how to derive from an existing style to
+    customize the look of a graphical element:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.h 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.cpp 2
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.cpp 3
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.cpp 4
+
+    \section2 QStyle Functions
+
+    The QStyle class defines three functions for drawing the primitive,
+    control, and complex elements:
+    \l{QStyle::}{drawPrimitive()},
+    \l{QStyle::}{drawControl()}, and
+    \l{QStyle::}{drawComplexControl()}. The functions takes the
+    following parameters:
+
+    \list
+        \o the enum value of the element to draw
+        \o a QStyleOption which contains the information needed to
+           draw the element.
+        \o a QPainter with which to draw the element.
+        \o a pointer to a QWidget, typically the widget
+           that the element is painted on.
+    \endlist
+
+    Not all widgets send a pointer to themselves. If the style
+    option sent to the function does not contain the information you
+    need, you should check the widget implementation to see if it
+    sends a pointer to itself.
+
+    The QStyle class also provides helper functions that are used
+    when drawing the elements. The \l{QStyle::}{drawItemText()}
+    function draws text within a specified rectangle and taking a
+    QPalette as a parameter. The \l{QStyle::}{drawItemPixmap()}
+    function helps to align a pixmap within a specified bounding
+    rectangle.
+
+    Other QStyle functions do various calculations for the
+    functions that draw. The widgets also use these functions for
+    calculating size hints and also for bounding rectangle
+    calculations if they draw several style elements themselves.
+    As with the functions that draw elements the helper functions
+    typically takes the same arguments.
+
+    \list
+        \o The \l{QStyle::}{subElementRect()} function takes a
+        \l{QStyle::}{SubElement} enum value, and calculates a bounding
+        rectangle for a sub element. The style uses this function to
+        know where to draw the different parts of an element. This is
+        mainly done for reuse. If you create a new style, you can use
+        the same location of sub elements as the super class.
+
+        \o The \l{QStyle::}{subControlRect()} function is used to
+        calculate bounding rectangles for sub controls in complex
+        controls. When you implement a new style, you reimplement \c
+        subControlRect() and calculate the rectangles that are different
+        from the super class.
+
+        \o The \l{QStyle::}{pixelMetric()} function returns a pixel
+        metric, which is a style dependent size given in screen
+        pixels. It takes a value of the \l{QStyle::}{PixelMetric} enum
+        and returns the correct measure. Note that pixel metrics do
+        not necessarily have to be static measures, but can be
+        calculated with, for example, the style option.
+
+        \o The \l{QStyle::}{hitTestComplexControl()} function returns the
+        sub control that the mouse pointer is over in a complex control.
+        Usually, this is simply a matter of using
+        \l{QStyle::}{subControlRect()} to get the bounding rectangles of
+        the sub controls, and see which rectangle contains the position of
+        the cursor.
+    \endlist
+
+    QStyle also have the functions \l{QStyle::}{polish()} and
+    \l{QStyle::}{unpolish()}. All widgets are sent to the \c polish()
+    function before being shown and to \c unpolish() when they
+    are hidden. You can use these functions to set attributes on the
+    widgets or do other work that is required by your style. For
+    instance, if you need to know when the mouse is hovering over the
+    widget, you need to set the \l{Qt::}{WA_Hover} widget attribute.
+    The State_MouseOver state flag will then be set in the widget's
+    style options.
+
+    QStyle has a few static helper functions that do some common and
+    difficult tasks. They can calculate the position of a slider
+    handle from the value of the slider and transform rectangles
+    and draw text considering reverse layouts; see the QStyle
+    class documentation for more details.
+
+    The usual approach when one reimplements QStyle virtual
+    functions is to do work on elements that are different from the
+    super class; for all other elements, you can simply use the super
+    class implementation.
+
+    \section2 The Palette
+
+    Each style provides a color - that is, QBrush - palette that
+    should be used for drawing the widgets. There is one set of colors
+    for the different widget states (QPalette::ColorGroup): active
+    (widgets in the window that has keyboard focus), inactive (widgets
+    used for other windows), and disabled (widgets that are set
+    disabled). The states can be found by querying the State_Active
+    and State_Enabled state flags. Each set contains color certain
+    roles given by the QPalette::ColorRole enum. The roles describe in
+    which situations the colors should be used (e.g., for painting
+    widget backgrounds, text, or buttons).
+
+    How the color roles are used is up to the style. For instance, if
+    the style uses gradients, one can use a palette color and make it
+    darker or lighter with QColor::darker() and QColor::lighter() to
+    create the gradient. In general, if you need a brush that is not
+    provided by the palette, you should try to derive it from one.
+
+    QPalette, which provides the palette, stores colors for
+    different widget states and color roles. The palette for a style
+    is returned by \l{QStyle::}{standardPalette()}. The standard
+    palette is not installed automatically when a new style is set
+    on the application (QApplication::setStyle()) or widget
+    (QWidget::setStyle()), so you must set the palette yourself
+    with (QApplication::setPalette()) or (QWidget::setPalette()).
+
+    It is not recommended to hard code colors as applications and
+    individual widgets can set their own palette and also use the
+    styles palette for drawing. Note that none of Qt's widgets set
+    their own palette. The java style does hard code some colors, but
+    its author looks past this in silence. Of course, it is not
+    intended that the style should look good with any palette.
+
+    \section2 Implementation Issues
+
+    When you implement styles, there are several issues to
+    consider. We will give some hints and advice on implementation
+    here.
+
+    When implementing styles, it is necessary to look through the
+    code of the widgets and code of the base class and its ancestors.
+    This is because the widgets use the style differently, because the
+    implementation in the different styles virtual functions can
+    affect the state of the drawing (e.g., by altering the QPainter
+    state without restoring it and drawing some elements without using
+    the appropriate pixel metrics and sub elements).
+
+    It is recommended that the styles do not alter the proposed size
+    of widgets with the QStyle::sizeFromContents() function but let
+    the QCommonStyle implementation handle it. If changes need to be
+    made, you should try to keep them small; application development
+    may be difficult if the layout of widgets looks considerably
+    different in the various styles.
+
+    We recommend using the QPainter directly for drawing, i.e., not
+    use pixmaps or images. This makes it easier for the style conform
+    to the palette (although you can set your own color table on a
+    QImage with \l{QImage::}{setColorTable()}).
+
+    It is, naturally, possible to draw elements without using the
+    style to draw the sub elements as intended by Qt. This is
+    discouraged as custom widgets may depend on these sub elements to
+    be implemented correctly. The widget walkthrough shows how Qt
+    uses the sub elements.
+
+    \section1 Java Style
+
+    We have implemented a style that resembles the Java default look
+    and feel (previously known as Metal). We have done this as it is
+    relatively simple to implement and we wanted to build a style for
+    this overview document. To keep it simple and not to extensive, we
+    have simplified the style somewhat, but Qt is perfectly able to
+    make an exact copy of the style. However, there are no concrete
+    plans to implement the style as a part of Qt.
+
+    In this section we will have a look at some implementation
+    issues. Finally, we will see a complete example on the styling of
+    a Java widget. We will continue to use the java style
+    throughout the document for examples and widget images. The
+    implementation itself is somewhat involved, and it is not
+    intended that you should read through it.
+
+    \section2 Design and Implementation
+
+    The first step in designing the style was to select the base
+    class. We chose to subclass QWindowsStyle. This class implements
+    most of the functionality we need other than performing the actual
+    drawing. Also, windows and java share layout of sub controls for
+    several of the complex controls (which reduces the amount of code
+    required considerably).
+
+    The style is implemented in one class. We have done this
+    because we find it convenient to keep all code in one file. Also,
+    it is an advantage with regards to optimization as we instantiate
+    less objects. We also keep the number of functions at a minimum by
+    using switches to identify which element to draw in the functions.
+    This results in large functions, but since we divide the code for
+    each element in the switches, the code should still be easy to
+    read.
+
+    \section2 Limitations and Differences from Java
+
+    We have not fully implemented every element in the Java style.
+    This way, we have reduced the amount and complexity of the code.
+    In general, the style was intended as a practical example for
+    this style overview document, and not to be a part of Qt
+    itself.
+
+    Not all widgets have every state implemented. This goes for
+    states that are common, e.g., State_Disabled. Each state is,
+    however, implemented for at least one widget.
+
+    We have only implemented ticks below the slider. Flat push
+    buttons are also left out. We do not handle the case where the
+    title bars and dock window titles grows to small for their
+    contents, but simply draw sub controls over each other.
+
+    We have not tried to emulate the Java fonts. Java and Qt use very
+    different font engines, so we don't consider it worth the effort
+    as we only use the style as an example for this overview.
+
+    We have hardcoded the colors (we don't use the QPalette) for
+    the linear gradients, which are used, for example, for button
+    bevels, tool bars, and check boxes. This is because the Java
+    palette cannot produce these colors. Java does not change these
+    colors based on widget color group or role anyway (they are not
+    dependent on the palette), so it does not present a problem in any
+    case.
+
+    It is Qt's widgets that are styled. Some widgets do not exist
+    at all in Java, e.g., QToolBox. Others contain elements that the
+    Java widgets don't. The tree widget is an example of the latter in
+    which Java's JTree does not have a header.
+
+    The style does not handle reverse layouts. We assume that the
+    layout direction is left to right. QWindowsStyle handles reverse
+    widgets; if we implemented reverse layouts, widgets that we change
+    the position of sub elements, or handle text alignment in labels
+    our selves would need to be updated.
+
+    \section2 Styling Java Check Boxes
+
+    As an example, we will examine the styling of check boxes in the
+    java style. We describe the complete process and print all code in
+    both the java style and Qt classes involved. In the rest of this
+    document, we will not examine the source code of the individual
+    widgets. Hopefully, this will give you an idea on how to search
+    through the code if you need to check specific implementation
+    details; most widgets follow the same structure as the check
+    boxes. We have edited the QCommonStyle code somewhat to remove
+    code that is not directly relevant for check box styling.
+ 
+    We start with a look at how QCheckBox builds it style option,
+    which is QStyleOptionButton for checkboxes:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 0
+
+    First we let QStyleOption set up the option with the information
+    that is common for all widgets with \c initFrom().  We will look at
+    this shortly.
+
+    The down boolean is true when the user press the box down; this is
+    true whether the box is checked or not of the checkbox.  The
+    State_NoChange state is set when we have a tristate checkbox and
+    it is partially checked. It has State_On if the box is checked and
+    State_Off if it is unchecked. State_MouseOver is set if the mouse
+    hovers over the checkbox and the widget has attribute Qt::WA_Hover
+    set - you set this in QStyle::polish(). In addition, the style
+    option also contains the text, icon, and icon size of the button.
+
+    \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()} sets up the style option with the
+    attributes that are common for all widgets. We print its
+    implementation here:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 1
+
+    The State_Enabled is set when the widget is enabled. When the
+    widget has focus the State_HasFocus flag is set. Equally, the
+    State_Active flag is set when the widget is a child of the active
+    window. The State_MouseOver will only be set if the widget has
+    the WA_HoverEnabled windows flag set. Notice that keypad
+    navigation must be enabled in Qt for the State_HasEditFocus to
+    be included; it is not included by default.
+
+    In addition to setting state flags the QStyleOption contains
+    other information about the widget: \c direction is the layout
+    direction of the layout, \c rect is the bounding rectangle of the
+    widget (the area in which to draw), \c palette is the QPalette
+    that should be used for drawing the widget, and \c fontMetrics is
+    the metrics of the font that is used by the widget.
+
+    We give an image of a checkbox and the style option to match
+    it.
+
+    \image javastyle/checkboxexample.png A java style checkbox
+
+    The above checkbox will have the following state flags in its
+    style option:
+
+    \table 90%
+    \header
+        \o State flag
+        \o Set
+    \row
+        \o State_Sunken
+        \o Yes
+    \row
+        \o State_NoChange
+        \o No
+    \row
+        \o State_On
+        \o Yes
+    \row
+        \o State_Off
+        \o No
+    \row
+        \o State_MouseOver
+        \o Yes
+    \row
+        \o State_Enabled
+        \o Yes
+    \row
+        \o State_HasFocus
+        \o Yes
+    \row
+        \o State_KeyboardFocusChange
+        \o No
+    \row
+        \o State_Active
+        \o Yes
+    \endtable
+
+    The QCheckBox paints itself in QWidget::paintEvent() with
+    style option \c opt and QStylePainter \c p. The QStylePainter
+    class is a convenience class to draw style elements. Most
+    notably, it wraps the methods in QStyle used for painting. The
+    QCheckBox draws itself as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 2
+
+    QCommonStyle handles the CE_CheckBox element. The QCheckBox
+    has two sub elements: SE_CheckBoxIndicator (the checked indicator)
+    and SE_CheckBoxContents (the contents, which is used for the
+    checkbox label). QCommonStyle also implements these sub element
+    bounding rectangles. We have a look at the QCommonStyle code:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 3
+
+    As can be seen from the code extract, the common style gets
+    the bounding rectangles of the two sub elements of
+    CE_CheckBox, and then draws them. If the checkbox has focus,
+    the focus frame is also drawn.
+
+    The java style draws CE_CheckBoxIndicator, while QCommonStyle
+    handles CE_CheckboxLabel. We will examine each implementation and
+    start with CE_CheckBoxLabel:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 4
+
+    \l{QStyle::}{visualAlignment()} adjusts the alignment of text
+    according to the layout direction. We then draw an icon if it
+    exists, and adjust the space left for the text.
+    \l{QStyle::}{drawItemText()} draws the text taking alignment,
+    layout direction, and the mnemonic into account. It also uses the
+    palette to draw the text in the right color.
+
+    The drawing of labels often get somewhat involved. Luckily, it
+    can usually be handled by the base class. The java style
+    implements its own push button label since Java-contrary to
+    windows-center button contents also when the button has an icon.
+    You can examine that implementation if you need an example of
+    reimplementing label drawing.
+
+    We take a look at the java implementation
+    of CE_CheckBoxIndicator in \c drawControl():
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/javastyle.cpp 0
+
+    We first save the state of the painter. This is not always
+    necessary but in this case the QWindowsStyle needs the painter in
+    the same state as it was when PE_IndicatorCheckBox was called (We
+    could also set the state with function calls, of course). We then
+    use \c drawButtonBackground() to draw the background of the check
+    box indicator. This is a helper function that draws the background
+    and also the frame of push buttons and check boxes. We take a look
+    at that function below. We then check if the mouse is hovering
+    over the checkbox. If it is, we draw the frame java checkboxes
+    have when the box is not pressed down and the mouse is over it.
+    You may note that java does not handle tristate boxes, so we have
+    not implemented it.
+
+    Here we use a png image for our indicator. We could also check
+    here if the widget is disabled. We would then have to use
+    another image with the indicator in the disabled color.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/javastyle.cpp 1
+
+    We have seen how check boxes are styled in the java style from the
+    widget gets a paint request to the style is finished painting. To
+    learn in detail how each widget is painted, you need to go through
+    the code step-by-step as we have done here.  However, it is
+    usually enough to know which style elements the widgets draw. The
+    widget builds a style option and calls on the style one or more
+    times to draw the style elements of which it consists. Usually,
+    it is also sufficient to know the states a widget can be in and the
+    other contents of the style option, i.e., what we list in the next
+    section.
+
+    \section1 Widget Walkthrough
+
+    In this section, we will examine how most of Qt's widgets are
+    styled.  Hopefully, this will save you some time and effort while
+    developing your own styles and widgets. You will not find
+    information here that is not attainable elsewhere (i.e., by
+    examining the source code or the class descriptions for the style
+    related classes).
+
+    We mostly use java style widgets as examples. The java style does not
+    draw every element in the element trees. This is because they are
+    not visible for that widget in the java style. We still make sure
+    that all elements are implemented in a way that conforms with the
+    java style as custom widgets might need them (this does not
+    exclude leaving implementations to QWindowsStyle though).
+
+    The following is given for each widget:
+
+    \list
+        \o A table with the members (variables, etc.) of its style option.
+        \o A table over the state flags (QStyle::StateFlag) that
+           can be set on the widget and when the states are set.
+        \o Its element tree (see section \l{The Style Elements}).
+        \o An image of the widget in which the elements are outlined.
+        \omit This is not written yet - probably never will be
+              either
+        \o List of style hints that should be checked for the
+           widget.
+        \o List of standard pixmaps that could be used by the
+           elements.
+        \endomit
+    \endlist
+
+    The element tree contains the primitive, control, and complex
+    style elements. By doing a top-down traversal of the element tree,
+    you get the sequence in which the elements should be drawn. In the
+    nodes, we have written the sub element rectangles, sub control
+    elements, and pixel metrics that should be considered when drawing
+    the element of the node.
+
+    Our approach on styling center on the drawing of the widgets. The
+    calculations of sub elements rectangles, sub controls, and pixel
+    metrics used \bold during drawing is only listed as contents in
+    the element trees. Note that there are rectangles and pixel
+    metrics that are only used by widgets. This leaves these
+    calculations untreated in the walkthrough. For instance, the
+    \l{QStyle::}{subControlRect()} and
+    \l{QStyle::}{sizeFromContents()} functions often call
+    \l{QStyle::}{subElementRect()} to calculate their bounding
+    rectangles. We could draw trees for this as well. However, how
+    these calculations are done is completely up to the individual
+    styles, and they do not have to follow a specific structure (Qt
+    does not impose a specific structure). You should still make sure
+    that you use the appropriate pixel metrics, though. To limit the
+    size of the document, we have therefore chosen not to include
+    trees or describe the calculations made by the Java (or any other)
+    style.
+
+    You may be confused about how the different pixel metrics, sub
+    element rectangles, and sub control rectangles should be used when
+    examining the trees. If you are in doubt after reading the QStyle
+    enum descriptions, we suggest that you examine the QCommonStyle
+    and QWindowsStyle implementations.
+
+    Some of the bounding rectangles that we outline in the widget
+    images are equal. Reasons for this are that some elements draw
+    backgrounds while others draw frames and labels. If in doubt,
+    check the description of each element in QStyle. Also, some
+    elements are there to layout, i.e., decide where to draw, other
+    elements.
+
+    \section2 Common Widget Properties
+
+    Some states and variables are common for all widgets. These are
+    set with QStyleOption::initFrom(). Not all elements use this function;
+    it is the widgets that create the style options, and for some
+    elements the information from \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()} is not
+    necessary.
+
+    A table with the common states follows:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o State Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Enabled
+            \o Set if the widget is not disabled (see
+               QWidget::setEnabled())
+        \row
+            \o State_Focus
+            \o Set if the widget has focus (see
+               QWidget::hasFocus())
+        \row
+            \o State_KeyobordFocusChange
+            \o Set when the user changes focus with the keyboard
+               (see Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange)
+        \row
+            \o State_MouseOver
+            \o Set if the mouse cursor is over the widget
+        \row
+            \o State_Active
+            \o Set if the widget is a child of the active window.
+        \row
+            \o State_HasEditFocus
+            \o Set if the widget has the edit focus
+    \endtable
+
+    The other common members for widgets are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o rect
+            \o The bounding rectangle of the element to draw. This
+               is set to the widget bounding rectangle
+               (QWidget::rect()).
+        \row
+            \o direction
+            \o The layout direction; a value of the
+               Qt::LayoutDirection enum.
+        \row
+            \o palette
+            \o The QPalette to use when drawing the element. This
+               is set to the widgets palette (QWidget::palette()).
+        \row
+            \o fontMetrics
+            \o The QFontMetrics to use when drawing text on the
+               widget.
+    \endtable
+
+    The complex style options (classes that inherit
+    QStyleOptionComplex) used for complex style elements share two
+    variables: \l{QStyleOptionComplex::}{subControls} and
+    \l{QStyleOptionComplex::}{activeSubControls}. Both variables are
+    an OR'ed combination of QStyle::SubControl enum values. They
+    indicate which sub controls the complex control consists of and
+    which of these controls are currently active.
+
+    As mentioned, the style calculates the size of the widgets
+    contents, which the widgets calculate their size hints from. In
+    addition, complex controls also use the style to test which
+    sub-controls the mouse is over. 
+
+    \section2 Widget Reference
+
+    Without further delay, we present the widget walkthrough; each
+    widget has its own sub-section.
+
+    \section3 Push Buttons
+
+    The style structure for push buttons is shown below. By doing a
+    top-down traversal of the tree, you get the sequence in which the
+    elements should be drawn.
+
+    \image javastyle/pushbutton.png The style structure for push buttons
+
+    The layout of the buttons, with regard element bounds, varies from
+    style to style. This makes it difficult to show conceptual images
+    of this. Also, elements may - even be intended to - have the same
+    bounds; the PE_PushButtonBevel, for instance, is used in
+    QCommonStyle to draw the elements that contains it:
+    PE_FrameDefaultButton, PE_FrameButtonBevel, and
+    PE_PanelButtonCommand, all of which have the same bounds in common
+    and windows style.  PE_PushButtonBevel is also responsible for
+    drawing the menu indicator (QCommonStyle draws
+    PE_IndicatorArrowDown).
+
+    An image of a push button in the java style that show the bounding
+    rectangles of the elements is given below. Colors are used to
+    separate the bounding rectangles in the image; they do not fill
+    any other purpose. This is also true for similar images for the
+    other widgets.
+
+    \image javastyle/button.png
+
+    The java style, as well as all other styles implemented in Qt,
+    does not use PE_FrameButtonBevel. It is usual that a button
+    with a PE_DefaultFrame adjusts the PE_PanelButtonCommand's
+    rectangle by PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator. The CE_PushButtonLabel
+    is found by adjusting the rect by PM_DefaultFrameWidth.
+
+    We will now examine the style option for push
+    buttons - QStyleOptionButton. A table for the states that
+    QPushButton can set on the style option follows:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o State Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o Button is down or menu is pressed shown
+        \row
+            \o State_On
+            \o Button is checked
+        \row
+            \o State_Raised
+            \o Button is not flat and not pressed down
+    \endtable
+
+    Other members of QStyleOptionButton is:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o features
+            \o Flags of the QStyleOptionButton::ButtonFeatures enum,
+               which describes various button properties (see enum)
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o The buttons QIcon (if any)
+        \row
+            \o iconSize
+            \o The QSize of the icon
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o a QString with the buttons text
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Check and Radio Buttons
+
+    The structures for radio and check buttons are identical.
+    We show the structure using QCheckBox element and pixel
+    metric names:
+
+    \image javastyle/checkbox.png
+
+    QStyleOptionButton is used as the style option for both check
+    and radio buttons. We first give a table of the states that
+    can be set in the option:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o State Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_sunken
+            \o The box is pressed down
+        \row
+            \o State_NoChange
+            \o The box is partially checked (for tristate
+               checkboxes.)
+        \row
+            \o State_On
+            \o The box is checked
+        \row
+            \o State_Off
+            \o The box is unchecked
+    \endtable
+
+    See \l{Push Buttons} for a table over other members in the
+    QStyleOptionButtonClass.
+
+    \section3 Tabs
+
+    In Qt, QTabBar uses the style to draw its tabs. Tabs exist either
+    in a QTabWidget, which contains a QTabBar, or as a separate bar.
+    If the bar is not part of a tab widget, it draws its own base.
+
+    QTabBar lays out the tabs, so the style does not have control over
+    tab placement. However, while laying out its tabs, the bar asks
+    the style for PM_TabBarTabHSpace and PM_TabBarTabVSpace, which is
+    extra width and height over the minimum size of the tab bar tab
+    label (icon and text). The style can also further influence the
+    tab size before it is laid out, as the tab bar asks for
+    CT_TabBarTab. The bounding rectangle of the bar is decided by the
+    tab widget when it is part of the widget (still considering
+    CT_TabBarTab).
+
+    The tab bar is responsible for drawing the buttons that appear on
+    the tab bar when all tabs do not fit. Their placement is not
+    controlled by the style, but the buttons are \l{QToolButton}s
+    and are therefore drawn by the style.
+
+    Here is the style structure for QTabWidget and QTabBar:
+
+    \image javastyle/tab.png
+
+    The dotted lines indicate that the QTabWidget contains a tab bar,
+    but does not draw it itself, that QTabBar only draws its base line
+    when not part of a tab widget, and that the tab bar keeps two tool
+    buttons that scroll the bar when all tabs do not fit; see \l{Tool
+    Buttons} for their element tree. Also note that since the buttons
+    are children of the tab bar, they are drawn after the bar. The
+    tabs bounding rectangles overlap the base by PM_TabBarBaseOverlap.
+
+    Here is a tab widget in the java style:
+
+    \image javastyle/tabwidget.png
+
+    In the java style (and also windows), the tab bar shape and label
+    have the same bounding rectangle as CE_TabBarTab. Notice that the
+    tabs overlap with the tab widget frame. The base of the tab bar
+    (if drawn) is the area where the tabs and frame overlap.
+
+    The style option for tabs (QStyleOptionTab) contains the necessary
+    information for drawing tabs. The option contains the position of
+    the tab in the tab bar, the position of the selected tab, the
+    shape of the tab, the text, and icon. After Qt 4.1 the option
+    should be cast to a QStyleOptionTabV2, which also contains the
+    icons size.
+
+    As the java style tabs don't overlap, we also present an image of
+    a tab widget in the windows style. Note that if you want the tabs
+    to overlap horizontally, you do that when drawing the tabs in
+    CE_TabBarTabShape; the tabs bounding rectangles will not be
+    altered by the tab bar. The tabs are drawn from left to right in a
+    north tab bar shape, top to bottom in an east tab bar shape, etc.
+    The selected tab is drawn last, so that it is easy to draw it over
+    the other tabs (if it is to be bigger).
+
+    \image javastyle/windowstabimage.png
+
+    A table of the states a tab bar can set on its tabs follows:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o State Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o The tab is pressed on with the mouse.
+        \row
+            \o State_Selected
+            \o If it is the current tab.
+        \row
+            \o State_HasFocus
+            \o The tab bar has focus and the tab is selected
+    \endtable
+
+    Note that individual tabs may be disabled even if the tab bar
+    is not. The tab will be active if the tab bar is active.
+
+    Here follows a table of QStyleOptionTabV2's members:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o cornerWidgets
+            \o Is flags of the CornerWidget enum, which indicate
+               if and which corner widgets the tab bar has.
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o The QIcon of the tab
+        \row
+            \o iconSize
+            \o The QSize of the icon
+        \row
+            \o position
+            \o A TabPosition enum value that indicates the tabs
+               position on the bar relative to the other tabs.
+        \row
+            \o row
+            \o holds which row the tab is in
+        \row
+            \o selectedPosition
+            \o A value of the SelectedPosition enum that indicates
+               whether the selected tab is adjacent to or is the
+               tab.
+        \row
+            \o shape
+            \o A value of the QTabBar::Shape enum indication
+               whether the tab has rounded or triangular corners
+               and the orientation of the tab.
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o The tab text
+    \endtable
+
+    The frame for tab widgets use QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame as
+    style option. We list its members here. It does not have
+    states set besides the common flags.
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o content
+        \row
+            \o leftCornerWidgetSize
+            \o The QSize of the left corner widget (if any).
+        \row
+            \o rightCornerWidgetSize
+            \o The QSize of the right corner widget (if any).
+        \row
+            \o lineWidth
+            \o holds the line with for drawing the panel.
+        \row
+            \o midLineWith
+            \o this value is currently always 0.
+        \row
+            \o shape
+            \o The shape of the tabs on the tab bar.
+        \row
+            \o tabBarSize
+            \o The QSize of the tab bar.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Scroll Bars
+
+    Here is the style structure for scrollBars:
+
+    \image javastyle/scrollbar.png
+
+    QScrollBar simply creates its style option and then draws
+    CC_ScrollBar. Some styles draw the background of add page and sub
+    page with PE_PanelButtonBevel and also use indicator arrows to
+    draw the arrows in the nest and previous line indicators; we have
+    not included these in the tree as their use is up to the
+    individual style. The style's PM_MaximumDragDistance is the
+    maximum distance in pixels the mouse can move from the bounds
+    of the scroll bar and still move the handle.
+
+    Here is an image of a scrollbar in the java style:
+
+    \image javastyle/scrollbarimage.png
+
+    You may notice that the scrollbar is slightly different from
+    Java's as it has two line up indicators. We have done this to show
+    how that you can have two separate bounding rectangles for a
+    single sub control. The scroll bar is an example of a widget that
+    is entirely implemented by the java style - neither QWindowsStyle
+    nor QCommonStyle are involved in the drawing.
+
+    We have a look at the different states a scroll bar can set on
+    the style option:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o State Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Horizontal
+            \o The scroll bar is horizontal
+    \endtable
+
+    The style option of QScrollBar is QStyleOptionSlider. Its
+    members are listed in the following table. The option is used
+    by all \l{QAbstractSlider}s; we only describe the members
+    relevant for scroll bars here.
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o maximum
+            \o the maximum value of the scroll bar
+        \row
+            \o minimum
+            \o the minimum value of the scroll bar
+        \row
+            \o notchTarget
+            \o the number of pixels between notches
+        \row
+            \o orientation
+            \o a value of the Qt::Orientation enum that specifies
+               whether the scroll bar is vertical or horizontal
+        \row
+            \o pageStep
+            \o the number to increase or decrease the sliders
+               value (relative to the size of the slider and its value
+               range) on page steps.
+        \row
+            \o singleStep
+            \o the number to increase or decrease the sliders
+               value on single (or line) steps
+        \row
+            \o sliderValue
+            \o The value of the slider
+        \row
+            \o sliderPosition
+            \o the position of the slider handle. This is the same
+               as \c sliderValue if the scroll bar is
+               QAbstractSlider::tracking. If not, the scroll
+               bar does not update its value before the mouse
+               releases the handle.
+        \row
+            \o upsideDown
+            \o holds the direction in which the scroll bar
+               increases its value. This is used instead of
+               QStyleOption::direction for all abstract sliders.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Sliders
+
+    When calculating the sliders size hint, PM_SliderTickness and
+    PM_SliderLength is queried from the style. As with scroll bars,
+    the QSlider only lets the user move the handle if the mouse is
+    within PM_MaximumDragDistance from the slider bounds. When it
+    draws itself it creates the style option and calls \c
+    drawComplexControl() with CC_Slider:
+
+    \image javastyle/slider.png
+
+    We also show a picture of a slider in the java style. We show
+    the bounding rectangles of the sub elements as all drawing is done
+    in CC_Slider.
+
+    \image javastyle/sliderimage.png
+
+    QSlider uses QStyleOptionSlider as all \l{QAbstractSlider}s do. We
+    present a table with the members that affect QSlider:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o maximum
+            \o the maximum value of the slider
+        \row
+            \o minimum
+            \o the minimum value of the slider
+        \row
+            \o notchTarget
+            \o this is the number of pixels between each notch
+        \row
+            \o orientation
+            \o a Qt::Orientation enum value that gives whether the
+               slider is vertical or horizontal.
+        \row
+            \o pageStep
+            \o a number in slider value to increase or decrease
+               for page steps
+        \row
+            \o singleStep
+            \o the number to increase or decrease the sliders
+               value on single (or line) steps.
+        \row
+            \o sliderValue
+            \o the value of the slider.
+        \row
+            \o sliderPosition
+            \o the position of the slider given as a slider value.
+               This  will be equal to the \c sliderValue if the
+               slider is \l{QAbstractSlider::}{tracking}; if
+               not, the sliders value will not change until the handle is
+               released with the mouse.
+        \row
+            \o  upsideDown
+            \o  this member is used instead of QStyleOption::direction
+                for all abstract sliders.
+    \endtable
+
+    You should note that the slider does not use direction for
+    reverse layouts; it uses \c upsideDown.
+
+    \section3 Spin Boxes
+
+    When QSpinBox paints itself it creates a QStyleOptionSpinBox and
+    asks the style to draw CC_SpinBox. The edit field is a line
+    edit that is a child of the spin box. The dimensions of the
+    field is calculated by the style with SC_SpinBoxEditField.
+
+    Here follows the style tree for spin boxes. It is not
+    required that a style uses the button panel primitive to paint
+    the indicator backgrounds. You can see an image below the tree
+    showing the sub elements in QSpinBox in the java style.
+
+    \image javastyle/spinbox.png
+
+    \image javastyle/spinboximage.png
+
+    The QStyleOptionSpinBox, which is the style option for spin
+    boxes. It can set the following states on the spin box.:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o State Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o Is set if one of the sub controls CC_SpinUp or
+               CC_SpinDown is pressed on with the mouse.
+    \endtable
+
+    The rest of the members in the spin boxes style options are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Property
+            \o Function
+        \row
+            \o frame
+            \o boolean that is true if the spin box is to draw a
+               frame.
+        \row
+            \o buttonSymbols
+            \o Value of the ButtonSymbols enum that decides the
+               symbol on the up/down buttons.
+        \row
+            \o stepEnabled
+            \o A value of the StepEnabled indication which of the
+               spin box buttons are pressed down.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Title Bar
+
+    The title bar complex control, CC_TitleBar, is used to draw
+    the title bars of internal windows in QMdiArea. It typically
+    consists of a window title and close, minimize, system menu, and
+    maximize buttons. Some styles also provide buttons for shading
+    the window, and a button for context sensitive help.
+
+    The bar is drawn in CC_TitleBar without using any sub elements.
+    How the individual styles draw their buttons is individual, but
+    there are standard pixmaps for the buttons that the style should
+    provide.
+
+    \image javastyle/titlebar.png
+
+    In an image over a title bar in the java style, we show the
+    bounding rectangles of the sub elements supported by the java style
+    (all of which are drawn with standard pixmaps). It is usual to
+    draw the button backgrounds using PE_PanelButtonTool, but it's no
+    rule.
+
+    \image javastyle/titlebarimage.png
+
+    The style option for title bars is QStyleOptionTitleBar. It's
+    members are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o The title bars icon
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o the text for the title bar's label
+        \row
+            \o windowFlags
+            \o flags of the Qt::WindowFlag enum. The window flags
+               used by QMdiArea for window management.
+        \row
+            \o titleBarState
+            \o this is the QWidget::windowState() of the window
+               that contains the title bar.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Combo Box
+
+    A QComboBox uses the style to draw the button and label of
+    non-editable boxes with CC_ComboBox and CE_ComboBoxLabel.
+
+    The list that pops up when the user clicks on the combo box is
+    drawn by a \l{Delegate Classes}{delegate}, which we do not cover
+    in this overview. You can, however, use the style to control the
+    list's size and position with the sub element
+    SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup. The style also decides where the edit
+    field for editable boxes should be with SC_ComboBoxEditField; the
+    field itself is a QLineEdit that is a child of the combo box.
+
+    \image javastyle/combobox.png
+
+    We show an image over a java style combo box in which we have
+    outlined its sub elements and sub element rectangles:
+
+    \image javastyle/comboboximage.png
+
+    Java combo boxes do not use the focus rect; it changes its
+    background color when it has focus. The SC_ComboBoxEdit field is
+    used both by QComboBox to calculate the size of the edit field and
+    the style for calculating the size of the combo box label.
+
+    The style option for combo boxes is QStyleOptionComboBox. It
+    can set the following states:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Selected
+            \o The box is not editable and has focus
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o SC_ComboBoxArrow is active
+        \row
+            \o State_on
+            \o The container (list) of the box is visible
+    \endtable
+
+    The style options other members are:
+
+    \table
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o currentIcon
+            \o the icon of the current (selected) item of the
+               combo box.
+        \row
+            \o currentText
+            \o the text of the current item in the box.
+        \row
+            \o editable
+            \o holds whether the combo box is editable or not
+        \row
+            \o frame
+            \o holds whether the combo box has a frame or not
+        \row
+            \o iconSize
+            \o the size of the current items icon.
+        \row
+            \o popupRect
+            \o the bounding rectangle of the combo box's popup
+               list.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Group Boxes
+
+    When calculating the size hint, QGroupBox fetches three pixel
+    metrics from the style: PM_IndicatorWidth,
+    PM_CheckBoxLabelSpacing, and PM_IndicatorHeight.  QGroupBox has
+    the following style element tree:
+
+    \image javastyle/groupbox.png
+
+    Qt does not impose restrictions on how the check box is drawn; the
+    java style draws it with CE_IndicatorCheckBox. See \l{Check and
+    Radio Buttons} for the complete tree.
+
+    We also give an image of the widget with the sub controls and
+    sub control rectangles drawn:
+
+    \image javastyle/groupboximage.png
+
+    The style option for group boxes are QStyleOptionGroupBox. The
+    following states can be set on it:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_On
+            \o The check box is checked
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o The checkbox is pressed down
+        \row
+            \o State_Off
+            \o The check box is unchecked (or there is no check box)
+    \endtable
+
+    The remaining members of QStyleOptionGroupBox are:
+
+    \table
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o features
+            \o flags of the QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeatures
+               enum describing the frame of the group box.
+        \row
+            \o lineWidth
+            \o the line width with which to draw the panel. This
+               is always 1.
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o the text of the group box.
+        \row
+            \o textAlignment
+            \o the alignment of the group box title
+        \row
+            \o textColor
+            \o the QColor of the text
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Splitters
+
+    As the structure of splitters are simple and do not contain any
+    sub elements, we do not include image of splitters. CE_Splitter
+    does not use any other elements or metrics.
+
+    For its style option, Splitters uses the base class QStyleOption.
+    It can set the following state flags on it:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Horizontal
+            \o Set if it is a horizontal splitter
+    \endtable
+
+    QSplitter does not use \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()} to set up its
+    option; it sets the State_MouseOver and State_Disabled flags
+    itself.
+
+    \section3 Progress Bar
+
+    The CE_ProgressBar element is used by QProgressBar, and it is the
+    only element used by this widget. We start with looking at the
+    style structure:
+
+    \image javastyle/progressbar.png
+
+    Here is a progress bar in the windows style (the java style
+    bounding rectangles are equal):
+
+    \image javastyle/progressbarimage.png
+
+    The style option for QProgressBar is QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.
+    The bar does not set any state flags, but the other members of the
+    option are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o minimum
+            \o The minimum value of the bar
+        \row
+            \o maximum
+            \o The maximum value of the bar
+        \row
+            \o progress
+            \o The current value of the bar
+        \row
+            \o textAlignment
+            \o How the text is aligned in the label
+        \row
+            \o textVisible
+            \o Whether the label is drawn
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o The label text
+        \row
+            \o orientation
+            \o Progress bars can be vertical or horizontal
+        \row
+            \o invertedAppearance
+            \o The progress is inverted (i.e., right to left in a
+               horizontal bar)
+        \row
+            \o bottomToTop
+            \o Boolean that if true, turns the label of vertical
+               progress bars 90 degrees.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Tool Buttons
+
+    Tool buttons exist either independently or as part of tool bars.
+    They are drawn equally either way. The QToolButton draws only one
+    style element: CC_ToolButton.
+
+    As you must be used to by now (at least if you have read this
+    document sequentially), we have a tree of the widget's style
+    structure:
+
+    \image javastyle/toolbutton.png
+
+    Note that PE_FrameButtonTool and PE_IndicatorArrowDown are
+    included in the tree as the java style draws them, but they can
+    safely be omitted if you prefer it. The structure may also be
+    different. QWindowsStyle, for instance, draws both
+    PE_IndicatorButtonDropDown and PE_IndicatorArrowDown in
+    CE_ToolButton.
+
+    We also have an image of a tool button where we have outlined
+    the sub element bounding rectangles and sub controls.
+
+    \image javastyle/toolbuttonimage.png
+
+    Here is the states table for tool buttons:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_AutoRise
+            \o the tool button has the autoRise property set
+        \row
+            \o State_raised
+            \o the button is not sunken (i.e., by being checked or
+               pressed on with the mouse).
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o the button is down
+        \row
+            \o State_On
+            \o the button is checkable and checked.
+    \endtable
+
+    QStyleOptionToolButton also contains the following members:
+
+    \table
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o arrowType
+            \o a Qt::ArrowType enum value, which contains the
+                 direction of the buttons arrow (if an arrow is to
+                 be used in place of an icon)
+        \row
+            \o features
+            \o flags of the QStyleOptionToolButton::ButtonFeature
+               enum describing if the button has an arrow, a menu,
+               and/or has a popup-delay.
+        \row
+            \o font
+            \o the QFont of the buttons label
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o the QIcon of the tool button
+        \row
+            \o iconSize
+            \o the icon size of the button's icon
+        \row
+            \o pos
+            \o the position of the button, as given by
+               QWidget::pos()
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o the text of the button
+        \row
+            \o toolButtonStyle
+            \o a Qt::ToolButtonStyle enum value which decides
+               whether the button shows the icon, the text, or both.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Toolbars
+
+    Toolbars are part of the \l{QMainWindow}{main window framework}
+    and cooperates with the QMainWindow to which it belongs while it
+    builds its style option. A main window has 4 areas that toolbars
+    can be placed in. They are positioned next to the four sides of
+    the window (i.e., north, south, west, and east). Within each area
+    there can be more than one line of toolbars; a line consists of
+    toolbars with equal orientation (vertical or horizontal) placed
+    next to each other.
+
+    \l{QToolbar}{QToolbar}s in Qt consists of three elements
+    CE_ToolBar, PE_IndicatorToolBarHandle, and
+    PE_IndicatorToolBarSeparator. It is QMainWindowLayout that
+    calculates the bounding rectangles (i.e., position and size of the
+    toolbars and their contents. The main window also uses the \c
+    sizeHint() of the items in the toolbars when calculating the size
+    of the bars.
+
+    Here is the element tree for QToolBar:
+
+    \image javastyle/toolbar.png
+
+    The dotted lines indicate that the QToolBar keeps an instance of
+    QToolBarLayout and that QToolBarSeparators are kept by
+    QToolBarLayout. When the toolbar is floating (i.e., has its own
+    window) the PE_FrameMenu element is drawn, else QToolbar draws
+    CE_ToolBar.
+
+    Here is an image of a toolbar in the java style:
+
+    \image javastyle/toolbarimage.png
+
+    QToolBarSaparator uses QStyleOption for their style option. It
+    sets the State_horizontal flag if the toolbar they live in is
+    horizontal. Other than that, they use \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()}.
+
+    The style option for QToolBar is QStyleOptionToolBar. The only
+    state flag set (besides the common flags) is State_Horizontal
+    if the bar is horizontal (i.e., in the north or south toolbar area).
+    The member variables of the style option are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o features
+            \o Holds whether the bar is movable in a value of the
+               ToolBarFeature, which is either Movable or None.
+        \row
+            \o lineWidth
+            \o The width of the tool bar frame.
+        \row
+            \o midLineWidth
+            \o This variable is currently not used and is always
+               0.
+        \row
+            \o positionOfLine
+            \o The position of the toolbar line within the toolbar
+               area to which it belongs.
+        \row
+            \o positionWithinLine
+            \o The position of the toolbar within the toolbar line.
+        \row
+            \o toolBarArea
+            \o The toolbar area in which the toolbar lives.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Menus
+
+    Menus in Qt are implemented in QMenu. The QMenu keeps a list of
+    action, which it draws as menu items. When QMenu receives paint
+    events ,it calculates the size of each menu item and draws them
+    individually with CE_MenuItem. (Menu items do not have a separate
+    element for their label (contents), so all drawing is done in
+    CE_MenuItem. The menu also draws the frame of the menu with
+    PE_FrameMenu. It also draws CE_MenuScroller if the style supports
+    scrolling. CE_MenuTearOff is drawn if the menu is to large for its
+    bounding rectangle.
+
+    In the style structure tree, we also include QMenu as it also does
+    styling related work. The bounding rectangles of menu items are
+    calculated for the menus size hint and when the menu is displayed
+    or resized.
+
+    \image javastyle/menu.png
+
+    The CE_MenuScroller and CE_MenuTearOff elements are handled by
+    QCommonStyle and are not shown unless the menu is to large to fit
+    on the screen. PE_FrameMenu is only drawn for pop-up menus.
+
+    QMenu calculates rectangles based on its actions and calls
+    CE_MenuItem and CE_MenuScroller if the style supports that.
+
+    It is also usual to use PE_IndicatorCheckBox (instead of using
+    PE_IndicatorMenuCheckMark) and PE_IndicatorRadioButton for drawing
+    checkable menu items; we have not included them in the style tree
+    as this is optional and varies from style to style.
+
+    \image javastyle/menuimage.png
+
+    The style option for menu items is QStyleOptionMenuItem. The
+    following tables describe its state flags and other members.
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Selected
+            \o The mouse is over the action and the action is not
+               a separator.
+        \row
+            \o State_Sunken
+            \o The mouse is pressed down on the menu item.
+        \row
+            \o State_DownArrow
+            \o Set if the menu item is a menu scroller and it scrolls
+               the menu downwards.
+    \endtable
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o checkType
+            \o A value of the \l{QStyleOptionMenuItem::}{CheckType} enum,
+               which is either NotCheckable, Exclusive, or
+               NonExclusive.
+        \row
+            \o checked
+            \o Boolean that is true if the menu item is checked.
+        \row
+            \o font
+            \o The QFont to use for the menu item's text.
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o the QIcon of the menu item.
+        \row
+            \o maxIconWidth
+            \o The maximum width allowed for the icon
+        \row
+            \o menuHasChecableItem
+            \o Boolean which is true if at least one item in the
+               menu is checkable.
+        \row
+            \o menuItemType
+            \o The type of the menu item. This a value of the
+               \l{QStyleOptionMenuItem::}{MenuItemType}.
+        \row
+            \o menuRect
+            \o The bounding rectangle for the QMenu that the menu
+               item lives in.
+        \row
+            \o tabWidth
+            \o This is the distance between the text of the menu
+               item and the shortcut.
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o The text of the menu item.
+    \endtable
+
+    The setup of the style option for CE_MenuTearOff and
+    CE_MenuScroller also uses QStyleOptionMenuItem; they only set the
+    \c menuRect variable in addition to the common settings with
+    QStyleOption's \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()}. 
+
+    \section3 Menu Bar
+
+    QMenuBar uses the style to draw each menu bar item and the empty
+    area of the menu bar. The pull-down menus themselves are
+    \l{QMenu}s (see \l{Menus}). The style element tree for the menu
+    bar follows:
+
+    \image javastyle/menubar.png
+
+    The panel and empty area is drawn after the menu items. The
+    QPainter that the QMenuBar sends to the style has the bounding
+    rectangles of the items clipped out (i.e., clip region), so you
+    don't need to worry about drawing over the items. The pixel
+    metrics in QMenuBar is used when the bounding rectangles of the
+    menu bar items are calculated.
+
+    \image javastyle/menubarimage.png
+
+    QStyleOptionMenuItem is used for menu bar items. The members that
+    are used by QMenuBar is described in the following table:
+
+    \table
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o menuRect
+            \o the bounding rectangle of the entire menu bar to
+               which the item belongs.
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o the text of the item
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o the icon of the menu item (it is not common that
+               styles draw this icon)
+    \endtable
+
+    QStyleOptionMenuItem is also used for drawing CE_EmptyMenuBarArea.
+
+    QStyleOptionFrame is used for drawing the panel frame The
+    \l{QStyleOptionFrame::}{lineWidth} is set to PM_MenuBarPanelWidth.
+    The \l{QStyleOptionFrame::}{midLineWidth} is currently always set
+    to 0. 
+
+    \section3 Item View Headers
+
+    It is the style that draws the headers of Qt's item views. The
+    item views keeps the dimensions on individual sections. Also
+    note that the delegates may use the style to paint decorations
+    and frames around items. QItemDelegate, for instance, draws
+    PE_FrameFocusRect and PE_IndicatorViewItemCheck.
+
+    \image javastyle/header.png
+
+    Here is a QTableWidget showing the bounding rects of a Java
+    header:
+
+    \image javastyle/headerimage.png
+
+    The QHeaderView uses CT_HeaderSection, PM_HeaderMargin and
+    PM_HeaderGripMargin for size and hit test calculations. The
+    PM_HeaderMarkSize is currently not used by Qt. QTableView draws
+    the button in the top-left corner (i.e., the area where the
+    vertical and horizontal headers intersect) as a CE_Header.
+
+    The style option for header views is QStyleOptionHeader. The view
+    paints one header section at a time, so the data is for the
+    section being drawn. Its contents are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o the icon of the header (for section that is being
+               drawn).
+        \row
+            \o iconAlignment
+            \o the alignment (Qt::Alignment) of the icon in the header.
+        \row
+            \o orientation
+            \o a Qt::Orientation value deciding whether the header
+               is the horizontal header above the view or the
+               vertical header on the left.
+        \row
+            \o position
+            \o a QStyleOptionHeader::SectionPosition value
+               giving the header section's position relative to
+               the other sections.
+        \row
+            \o section
+            \o holds the section that is being drawn.
+        \row
+            \o selectedPosition
+            \o a QStyleOptionHeader::SelectedPosition value giving
+               the selected section's position relative to the
+               section that is being painted.
+        \row
+            \o sortIndicator
+            \o a QStyleOptionHeader::SortIndicator value that
+               describes the direction in which the section's sort
+               indicator should be drawn.
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o the text of the currently drawn section.
+        \row
+            \o textAlignment
+            \o the Qt::Alignment of the text within the
+               headersection.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Tree Branch Indicators
+
+    The branch indicators in a tree view is drawn by the style with
+    PE_IndicatorBranch. We think of indicators here as the indicators
+    that describe the relationship of the nodes in the tree. The
+    generic QStyleOption is sent to the style for drawing this
+    elements. The various branch types are described by states. Since
+    there are no specific style option, we simply present the states
+    table:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o State
+            \o Set When
+        \row
+            \o State_Sibling
+            \o the node in the tree has a sibling (i.e., there is
+               another node in the same column).
+        \row
+            \o State_Item
+            \o this branch indicator has an item.
+        \row
+            \o State_Children
+            \o the branch has children (i.e., a new sub-tree can
+               be opened at the branch).
+        \row
+            \o State_Open
+            \o the branch indicator has an opened sub-tree.
+    \endtable
+
+    The tree view (and tree widget) use the style to draw the branches
+    (or nodes if you will) of the tree.
+
+    QStyleOption is used as the style for PE_IndicatorBranch has state
+    flags set depending on what type of branch it is.
+
+    Since there is no tree structure for branch indicators, we only
+    present an image of a tree in the java style. Each state is marked
+    in the image with a rectangle in a specific color (i.e., these
+    rectangles are not bounding rectangles). All combinations of
+    states you must be aware of are represented in the image.
+
+    \image javastyle/branchindicatorimage.png
+
+    \section3 Tool Boxes
+
+    PM_SmallIconSize for sizeHints.
+
+    QToolBox is a container that keeps a collection of widgets. It has
+    one tab for each widget and display one of them at a time. The
+    tool box lays the components it displays (the tool box buttons
+    and selected widget) in a QVBoxLayout. The style tree for tool
+    boxes looks like this:
+
+    \image javastyle/toolbox.png
+
+    We show an image of a tool box in the Plastique style:
+
+    \image javastyle/toolboximage.png
+
+    All elements have the same bounding rectangles in the
+    Plastique as well as the other Qt built-in styles.
+
+    The style option for tool boxes is QStyleOptionToolBox. It
+    contains the text and icon of the tool box contents. The only
+    state set by QToolBox is State_Sunken, which is set when the user
+    presses a tab down with the mouse. The rest of the
+    QStyleOptionToolBox members are:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o icon
+            \o the icon on the toolbox tab
+        \row
+            \o text
+            \o the text on the toolbox tab
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Size Grip
+
+    The size grip calculates its size hint with CT_SizeGrip. The pixel
+    metric PM_SizeGripSize is currently unused by Qt. The element tree
+    for and an image in the Plastique style of QSizeGrip follows:
+
+    \image javastyle/sizegrip.png
+
+    \image javastyle/sizegripimage.png
+
+    We show the size grip in a \l{QMainWindow}'s bottom right
+    corner.
+
+    The size grip style option, QStyleOptionSizeGrip, have one
+    member except the common members from QStyleOption:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o corner
+            \o a Qt::Corner value that describe which corner in a
+               window (or equivalent) the grip is located.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Rubber Band
+
+    The \l{QRubberBand}'s style tree consists of two nodes.
+
+    \image javastyle/rubberband.png
+
+    We present an image of a Java style window being moved in a
+    QMdiArea with a rubber band:
+
+    \image javastyle/rubberbandimage.png
+
+    The style option for rubber bands is QStyleOptionRubberBand.
+    Its members are:
+
+    \table
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o opaque
+            \o boolean that is true if the rubber band must be
+               drawn in an opaque style (i.e., color)
+        \row
+            \o shape
+            \o a QRubberBand::Shape enum value that holds the
+               shape of the band (which is either a rectangle or a
+               line) 
+    \endtable
+
+    \section3 Dock Widgets
+
+    When the dock widget lays out its contents it asks the style for
+    these pixel metrics: PM_DockWidgetSeparatorExtent,
+    PM_DockWidgetTitleBarButtonMargin, PM_DockWidgetFrameWidth, and
+    PM_DockWidgetTitleMargin. It also calculates the bounding
+    rectangles of the float and close buttons with
+    SE_DockWidgetCloseButton and SE_DockWidgetFloatButton.
+
+    \image javastyle/dockwidget.png
+
+    The dotted lines indicate that the sender keeps instances of the
+    recipient of the arrow (i.e., it is not a style element to draw).
+    The dock widget only draws PE_frameDockWidget when it is detached
+    from its main window (i.e., it is a top level window). If it is
+    docked it draws the indicator dock widget resize handle. We show a
+    dock widget in both docked and floating state in the plastique
+    style: 
+
+    \image javastyle/dockwidgetimage.png
+
+    The style option is QStyleOptionDockWidget:
+
+    \table 90%
+        \header
+            \o Member
+            \o Content
+        \row
+            \o closeable
+            \o boolean that holds whether the dock window can be
+               closed
+        \row
+            \o floatable
+            \o boolean that holds whether the dock window can
+               float (i.e., detach from the main window in which
+               it lives)
+        \row
+            \o movable
+            \o boolean that holds whether the window is movable
+               (i.e., can move to other dock widget areas)
+        \row
+            \o title
+            \o the title text of the dock window
+    \endtable
+
+    For the buttons, QStyleOptionButton is used (see \l{Tool Buttons}
+    for content description). The dock widget resize handle has a
+    plain QStyleOption.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/stylesheet.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/stylesheet.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a3fcb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/stylesheet.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,3962 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page stylesheet.html
+    \title Qt Style Sheets
+    \brief How to use style sheets to customize the appearance of widgets.
+
+    \ingroup frameworks-technologies
+
+    \previouspage {Implementing Styles and Style Aware Widgets}{Styles}
+    \contentspage Widgets and Layouts
+    \nextpage The Style Sheet Syntax
+
+    \keyword style sheet
+    \keyword stylesheet
+
+    Qt Style Sheets are a powerful mechanism that allows you to
+    customize the appearance of widgets, in addition to what is
+    already possible by subclassing QStyle. The concepts,
+    terminology, and syntax of Qt Style Sheets are heavily inspired
+    by HTML \l{http://www.w3.org/Style/CSS/}{Cascading Style Sheets
+    (CSS)} but adapted to the world of widgets.
+
+    Topics:
+
+    \list
+    \i \l{Overview}
+    \i \l{The Style Sheet Syntax}
+    \i \l{Qt Designer Integration}
+    \i \l{Customizing Qt Widgets Using Style Sheets}
+    \i \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference}
+    \i \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples}
+    \endlist
+
+    \target overview
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    Styles sheets are textual specifications that can be set on the
+    whole application using QApplication::setStyleSheet() or on a
+    specific widget (and its children) using
+    QWidget::setStyleSheet(). If several style sheets are set at
+    different levels, Qt derives the effective style sheet from all
+    of those that are set. This is called cascading.
+
+    For example, the following style sheet specifies that all
+    \l{QLineEdit}s should use yellow as their background color, and
+    all \l{QCheckBox}es should use red as the text color:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 0
+
+    For this kind of customization, style sheets are much more
+    powerful than QPalette. For example, it might be tempting to set
+    the QPalette::Button role to red for a QPushButton to obtain a
+    red push button. However, this wasn't guaranteed to work for all
+    styles, because style authors are restricted by the different
+    platforms' guidelines and (on Windows XP and Mac OS X) by the
+    native theme engine.
+
+    Style sheets let you perform all kinds of customizations that are
+    difficult or impossible to perform using QPalette alone. If you
+    want yellow backgrounds for mandatory fields, red text for
+    potentially destructive push buttons, or fancy check boxes, style
+    sheets are the answer.
+
+    Style sheets are applied on top of the current \l{QStyle}{widget
+    style}, meaning that your applications will look as native as
+    possible, but any style sheet constraints will be taken into
+    consideration. Unlike palette fiddling, style sheets offer
+    guarantees: If you set the background color of a QPushButton to be
+    red, you can be assured that the button will have a red background
+    in all styles, on all platforms. In addition, \l{Qt Designer}
+    provides style sheet integration, making it easy to view the effects
+    of a style sheet in different \l{QStyle}{widget styles}.
+
+    In addition, style sheets can be used to provide a distinctive
+    look and feel for your application, without having to subclass
+    QStyle. For example, you can specify arbitrary images for radio
+    buttons and check boxes to make them stand out. Using this
+    technique, you can also achieve minor customizations that would
+    normally require subclassing several style classes, such as
+    specifying a \l{QStyle::styleHint()}{style hint}. The
+    \l{widgets/stylesheet}{Style Sheet} example depicted below defines
+    two distinctive style sheets that you can try out and modify at
+    will.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage stylesheet-coffee-xp.png
+         \o \inlineimage stylesheet-pagefold.png
+    \row \o Coffee theme running on Windows XP
+         \o Pagefold theme running on Windows XP
+    \endtable
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage stylesheet-coffee-cleanlooks.png
+         \o \inlineimage stylesheet-pagefold-mac.png
+    \row \o Coffee theme running on Ubuntu Linux
+         \o Pagefold theme running on Mac OS X
+    \endtable
+
+    When a style sheet is active, the QStyle returned by QWidget::style()
+    is a wrapper "style sheet" style, \e not the platform-specific style. The
+    wrapper style ensures that any active style sheet is respected and
+    otherwise forwards the drawing operations to the underlying,
+    platform-specific style (e.g., QWindowsXPStyle on Windows XP).
+
+    Since Qt 4.5, Qt style sheets fully supports Mac OS X.
+
+    \warning Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle
+    subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \page stylesheet-syntax.html
+    \contentspage {Qt Style Sheet}{Contents}
+    \previouspage Qt Style Sheet
+    \nextpage Qt Designer Integration
+    \title The Style Sheet Syntax
+
+    Qt Style Sheet terminology and syntactic rules are almost
+    identical to those of HTML CSS. If you already know CSS, you can
+    probably skim quickly through this section.
+    
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Style Rules
+
+    Style sheets consist of a sequence of style rules. A \e{style
+    rule} is made up of a selector and a declaration. The
+    \e{selector} specifies which widgets are affected by the rule;
+    the \e{declaration} specifies which properties should be set on
+    the widget. For example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 1
+
+    In the above style rule, \c QPushButton is the selector and \c{{
+    color: red }} is the declaration. The rule specifies that
+    QPushButton and its subclasses (e.g., \c MyPushButton) should use
+    red as their foreground color.
+
+    Qt Style Sheet is generally case insensitive (i.e., \c color, 
+    \c Color, \c COLOR, and \c cOloR refer to the same property). 
+    The only exceptions are class names,
+    \l{QObject::setObjectName()}{object names}, and Qt property
+    names, which are case sensitive.
+
+    Several selectors can be specified for the same declaration,
+    using commas (\c{,}) to separate the selectors. For example,
+    the rule
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 2
+
+    is equivalent to this sequence of three rules:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 3
+
+    The declaration part of a style rule is a list of
+    \tt{\e{property}: \e{value}} pairs, enclosed in braces (\c{{}})
+    and separated with semicolons. For example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 4
+
+    See the \l{List of Properties} section below for the list of
+    properties provided by Qt widgets.
+
+    \section1 Selector Types
+
+    All the examples so far used the simplest type of selector, the
+    Type Selector. Qt Style Sheets support all the
+    \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-CSS2/selector.html#q1}{selectors
+    defined in CSS2}. The table below summarizes the most useful
+    types of selectors.
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Selector
+        \o Example
+        \o Explanation
+
+    \row
+        \o Universal Selector
+        \o \c *
+        \o Matches all widgets.
+
+    \row
+        \o Type Selector
+        \o \c QPushButton
+        \o Matches instances of QPushButton and of its subclasses.
+
+    \row
+        \o Property Selector
+        \o \c{QPushButton[flat="false"]}
+        \o Matches instances of QPushButton that are not
+           \l{QPushButton::}{flat}. You may use this selector to test
+           for any Qt property specified using Q_PROPERTY(). In
+           addition, the special \c class property is supported, for
+           the name of the class.
+            
+           This selector may also be used to test dynamic properties.
+           For more information on customization using dynamic properties,
+           refer to \l{Customizing Using Dynamic Properties}.
+
+           Instead of \c =, you can also use \c ~= to test whether a
+           Qt property of type QStringList contains a given QString.
+
+           \warning If the value of the Qt property changes after the
+           style sheet has been set, it might be necessary to force a
+           style sheet recomputation. One way to achieve this is to
+           unset the style sheet and set it again.
+
+    \row
+        \o Class Selector
+        \o \c .QPushButton
+        \o Matches instances of QPushButton, but not of its subclasses.
+
+           This is equivalent to \c{*[class~="QPushButton"]}.
+
+    \row
+        \o ID \target ID Selector
+           Selector
+        \o \c{QPushButton#okButton}
+        \o Matches all QPushButton instances whose
+           \l{QObject::objectName}{object name} is \c okButton.
+
+    \row
+        \o Descendant Selector
+        \o \c{QDialog QPushButton}
+        \o Matches all instances of QPushButton that are descendants
+           (children, grandchildren, etc.) of a QDialog.
+
+    \row
+        \o Child Selector
+        \o \c{QDialog > QPushButton}
+        \o Matches all instances of QPushButton that are direct
+           children of a QDialog.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 Sub-Controls
+
+    For styling complex widgets, it is necessary to access subcontrols of the
+    widget, such as the drop-down button of a QComboBox or the up and down
+    arrows of a QSpinBox. Selectors may contain \e{subcontrols} that make it
+    possible to restrict the application of a rule to specific widget
+    subcontrols. For example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 5
+
+    The above rule styles the drop-down button of all \l{QComboBox}es.
+    Although the double-colon (\c{::}) syntax is reminiscent of CSS3
+    Pseudo-Elements, Qt Sub-Controls differ conceptually from these and have
+    different cascading semantics.
+   
+    Sub-controls are always positioned with respect to another element - a
+    reference element. This reference element could be the widget or another
+    Sub-control. For example, the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#drop-down-sub}
+    {::drop-down} of a QComboBox is placed, by default, in the top right corner
+    of the Padding rectangle of the QComboBox. The
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#drop-down-sub}{::drop-down} is placed,
+    by default, in the Center of the Contents rectangle of the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#drop-down-sub}{::drop-down} Sub-control. See
+    the \l{List of Stylable Widgets} below for the Sub-controls to use to
+    style a widget and their default positions.
+
+    The origin rectangle to be used can be changed using the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin}
+    property. For example, if we want to place the drop-down in the margin
+    rectangle of the QComboBox instead of the default Padding rectangle, we
+    can specify:
+    
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 6
+    
+    The alignment of the drop-down within the Margin rectangle is changed 
+    using \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-position-prop}
+    {subcontrol-position} property.
+
+    The \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#width-prop}{width} and
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#height-prop}{height} properties can be used
+    to control the size of the Sub-control. Note that setting a
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#image-prop}{image} implicitly sets the size
+    of a Sub-control.
+
+    The relative positioning scheme
+    (\l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#position-prop}{position} : relative),
+    allows the position of the Sub-Control to be offset from its initial
+    position. For example, when the QComboBox's drop-down button is
+    pressed, we might like the arrow inside to be offset to give a
+    "pressed" effect. To achieve this, we can specify:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 7
+
+    The absolute positioning scheme
+    (\l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#position-prop}{position} : absolute),
+    allows the position and size of the Sub-control to be changed with
+    respect to the reference element.
+
+    Once positioned, they are treated the same as widgets and can be styled
+    using the \l{box model}.
+
+    See the \l{List of Sub-Controls} below for a list of supported
+    sub-controls, and \l{Customizing the QPushButton's Menu Indicator
+    Sub-Control} for a realistic example.
+
+    \note With complex widgets such as QComboBox and QScrollBar, if one
+    property or sub-control is customized, \bold{all} the other properties or
+    sub-controls must be customized as well.
+
+    \section1 Pseudo-States
+
+    Selectors may contain \e{pseudo-states} that denote that restrict
+    the application of the rule based on the widget's state.
+    Pseudo-states appear at the end of the selector, with a colon
+    (\c{:}) in between. For example, the following rule applies when
+    the mouse hovers over a QPushButton:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 8
+
+    Pseudo-states can be negated using the exclamation operator. For
+    example, the following rule applies when the mouse does not hover
+    over a QRadioButton:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 9
+
+    Pseudo-states can be chained, in which case a logical AND is
+    implied. For example, the following rule applies to when the
+    mouse hovers over a checked QCheckBox:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 10
+
+    Negated Pseudo-states may appear in Pseudo-state chains. For example,
+    the following rule applies when the mouse hovers over a QPushButton
+    that is not pressed:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 11
+
+    If needed, logical OR can be expressed using the comma operator:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 12
+
+    Pseudo-states can appear in combination with subcontrols. For
+    example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 13
+
+    See the \l{List of Pseudo-States} section below for the list of
+    pseudo-states provided by Qt widgets.
+
+    \section1 Conflict Resolution
+
+    Conflicts arise when several style rules specify the same
+    properties with different values. Consider the following style
+    sheet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 14
+
+    Both rules match QPushButton instances called \c okButton and
+    there is a conflict for the \c color property. To resolve this
+    conflict, we must take into account the \e specificity of the
+    selectors. In the above example, \c{QPushButton#okButton} is
+    considered more specific than \c QPushButton, because it
+    (usually) refers to a single object, not to all instances of a
+    class.
+
+    Similarly, selectors with pseudo-states are more specific than
+    ones that do not specify pseudo-states. Thus, the following style
+    sheet specifies that a \l{QPushButton} should have white text
+    when the mouse is hovering over it, otherwise red text:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 15
+
+    Here's a tricky one:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 16
+
+    Here, both selectors have the same specificity, so if the mouse
+    hovers over the button while it is enabled, the second rule takes
+    precedence. If we want the text to be white in that case, we can
+    reorder the rules like this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 17
+
+    Alternatively, we can make the first rule more specific:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 18
+
+    A similar issue arises in conjunction with Type Selectors.
+    Consider the following example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 19
+
+    Both rules apply to QPushButton instances (since QPushButton
+    inherits QAbstractButton) and there is a conflict for the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#color-prop}{color} property. Because QPushButton
+    inherits QAbstractButton, it might be tempting to assume that
+    \c QPushButton is more specific than \c QAbstractButton. However,
+    for style sheet computations, all Type Selectors have the same
+    specificity, and the rule that appears last takes precedence. In
+    other words, \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#color-prop}{color} is set to \c gray
+    for all \l{QAbstractButton}s, including \l{QPushButton}s. If we really
+    want \l{QPushButton}s to have red text, we can always reorder the
+    rules.
+
+    For determining the specificity of a rule, Qt Style Sheets follow
+    the
+    \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-CSS2/cascade.html#specificity}{CSS2
+    Specification}:
+
+    \quotation
+    \e{A selector's specificity is calculated as follows:}
+
+    \list
+    \o \e{count the number of ID attributes in the selector (= a)}
+    \o \e{count the number of other attributes and pseudo-classes in the selector (= b)}
+    \o \e{count the number of element names in the selector (= c)}
+    \o \e{ignore pseudo-elements [i.e., \l{subcontrols}].}
+    \endlist
+
+    \e{Concatenating the three numbers a-b-c (in a number system with a
+    large base) gives the specificity.}
+
+    \e{Some examples:}
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 20
+    \endquotation
+
+    \section1 Cascading
+
+    Style sheets can be set on the QApplication, on parent widgets,
+    and on child widgets. An arbitrary widget's effective style sheet
+    is obtained by merging the style sheets set on the widget's
+    ancestors (parent, grandparent, etc.), as well as any style sheet
+    set on the QApplication.
+
+    When conflicts arise, the widget's own style sheet is always
+    preferred to any inherited style sheet, irrespective of the
+    specificity of the conflicting rules. Likewise, the parent
+    widget's style sheet is preferred to the grandparent's, etc.
+
+    One consequence of this is that setting a style rule on a widget
+    automatically gives it precedence over other rules specified in
+    the ancestor widgets' style sheets or the QApplication style
+    sheet. Consider the following example. First, we set a style
+    sheet on the QApplication:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 21
+
+    Then we set a style sheet on a QPushButton object:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 22
+
+    The style sheet on the QPushButton forces the QPushButton (and
+    any child widget) to have blue text, in spite of the more
+    specific rule set provided by the application-wide style sheet.
+
+    The result would have been the same if we had written
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 23
+
+    except that if the QPushButton had children (which is unlikely),
+    the style sheet would have no impact on them.
+
+    Style sheet cascading is a complex topic. Refer to the
+    \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS2/cascade.html#cascade}{CSS2
+    Specification} for the gory details. Be aware that Qt currently
+    doesn't implement \c{!important}.
+
+    \section1 Inheritance
+
+    In classic CSS, when font and color of an item is not explicitly set,
+    it gets automatically inherited from the parent. When using Qt Style Sheets,
+    a widget does \bold{not} automatically inherit its font and color setting
+    from its parent widget.
+
+    For example, consider a QPushButton inside a QGroupBox:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 24
+
+    The QPushButton does not have an explicit color set. Hence, instead
+    of inheriting color of its parent QGroupBox, it has the system color.
+    If we want to set the color on a QGroupBox and its children, 
+    we can write:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 25
+
+    In contrast, setting a font and propagate using QWidget::setFont() and
+    QWidget::setPalette() propagates to child widgets.
+
+    \section1 Widgets inside C++ namespaces
+    
+    The Type Selector can be used to style widgets of a particular type. For
+    example,
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 26
+
+    Qt Style Sheet uses QObject::className() of the widget to determine
+    when to apply the Type Selector. When custom widgets are inside namespaces, 
+    the QObject::className() returns <namespace>::<classname>. This conflicts
+    with the syntax for \l{Sub-Controls}. To overcome this problem, 
+    when using the Type Selector for widgets inside namespaces, we must
+    replace the "::" with "--". For example,
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 27
+
+    \section1 Setting QObject properties
+    
+    From 4.3 and above, any designable Q_PROPERTY 
+    can be set using the qproperty-<property name> syntax.
+    
+    For example,
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 28
+
+    If the property references an enum declared with Q_ENUMS, you should
+    reference its constants by name, i.e., not their numeric value.
+
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \page stylesheet-designer.html
+    \contentspage {Qt Style Sheet}{Contents}
+    \previouspage The Style Sheet Syntax
+    \nextpage Customizing Qt Widgets Using Style Sheets
+    \title Qt Designer Integration
+
+    \l{Qt Designer}{Qt Designer} is an excellent tool
+    to preview style sheets. You can right-click on any widget in Designer
+    and select \gui{Change styleSheet...} to set the style sheet.
+
+    \image designer-stylesheet-options.png
+
+    In Qt 4.2 and later, \l{Qt Designer}{Qt Designer} also includes a
+    style sheet syntax highlighter and validator. The validator indicates
+    if the syntax is valid or invalid, at the bottom left of the \gui{Edit
+    Style Sheet} dialog.
+
+    \image designer-validator-highlighter.png
+
+    When you click \gui{OK} or \gui{Apply}, \QD will automatically display
+    the widget with its new stylesheet.
+
+    \image designer-stylesheet-usage.png
+    */
+
+/*!
+    \page stylesheet-customizing.html
+    \contentspage {Qt Style Sheet}{Contents}
+    \previouspage Qt Designer Integration
+    \nextpage Qt Style Sheets Reference
+    \title Customizing Qt Widgets Using Style Sheets
+
+    When using style sheets, every widget is treated as a box with four
+    concentric rectangles: the margin rectangle, the border rectangle, the
+    padding rectangle, and the content rectangle. The box model describes
+    this in further detail.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \target box model
+    \section1 The Box Model
+
+    The four concentric rectangles appear conceptually as below:
+
+    \image stylesheet-boxmodel.png
+
+    \list
+    \o The margin falls outside the border.
+    \o The border is drawn between the margin and the padding.
+    \o The padding falls inside the border, between the border and
+       the actual contents.
+    \o The content is what is left from the original widget or
+       subcontrol once we have removed the margin, the border, and
+       the padding.
+    \endlist
+
+    The \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#margin-prop}{margin},
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-width-prop}
+    {border-width}, and
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#padding-prop}{padding}
+    properties all default to zero. In that case, all four rectangles
+    (\c margin, \c border, \c padding, and \c content) coincide exactly.
+
+    You can specify a background for the widget using the 
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-image-prop}{background-image} 
+    property. By default, the background-image is drawn only for the area 
+    inside the border. This can be changed using the 
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-clip-prop}{background-clip}
+    property. You can use 
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-repeat-prop}{background-repeat}
+    and
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-origin-prop}{background-origin}
+    to control the repetition and origin of the background image.
+
+    A background-image does not scale with the size of the widget. To provide
+    a "skin" or background that scales along with the widget size, one must
+    use
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-image-prop}{border-image}. Since the
+    border-image property provides an alternate background, it is not required
+    to specify a background-image when border-image is specified. In the case,
+    when both of them are specified, the border-image draws over the 
+    background-image.
+
+    In addition, the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#image-prop}{image} property
+    may be used to draw an image over the border-image. The image specified does
+    not tile or stretch and when its size does not match the size of the widget,
+    its alignment is specified using the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#image-position-prop}{image-position} 
+    property. Unlike background-image and border-image, one may specify a
+    SVG in the image property, in which case the image is scaled automatically
+    according to the widget size.
+
+    The steps to render a rule are as follows:
+        \list
+        \o Set clip for entire rendering operation (border-radius)
+        \o Draw the background (background-image)
+        \o Draw the border (border-image, border)
+        \o Draw overlay image (image)
+        \endlist
+
+    \target sub controls
+    \section1 Sub-controls
+
+    A widget is considered as a hierarchy (tree) of subcontrols drawn on top
+    of each other. For example, the QComboBox draws the drop-down sub-control
+    followed by the down-arrow sub-control. A QComboBox is thus rendered as
+    follows:
+        \list
+        \o Render the QComboBox { } rule
+        \o Render the QComboBox::drop-down { } rule
+        \o Render the QComboBox::down-arrow { } rule
+        \endlist
+
+    Sub-controls share a parent-child relationship. In the case of QComboBox,
+    the parent of down-arrow is the drop-down and the parent of drop-down is
+    the widget itself. Sub-controls are positioned within their parent using
+    the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-position-prop}
+    {subcontrol-position} and
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin}
+    properties.
+    
+    Once positioned, sub-controls can be styled using the \l{box model}.
+
+    \note With complex widgets such as QComboBox and QScrollBar, if one
+    property or sub-control is customized, \bold{all} the other properties or
+    sub-controls must be customized as well.
+
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \page stylesheet-reference.html
+    \contentspage {Qt Style Sheet}{Contents}
+    \previouspage Customizing Qt Widgets Using Style Sheets
+    \nextpage Qt Style Sheets Examples
+    \title Qt Style Sheets Reference
+
+    Qt Style Sheets support various properties, pseudo-states, and
+    subcontrols that make it possible to customize the look of
+    widgets.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 List of Stylable Widgets
+
+    The following table lists the Qt widgets that can be customized
+    using style sheets:
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Widget
+        \o How to Style
+
+    \row
+        \o QAbstractScrollArea \target qabstractscrollarea-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}.
+
+           All derivatives of QAbstractScrollArea, including QTextEdit,
+           and QAbstractItemView (all item view classes), support
+           scrollable backgrounds using 
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-attachment-prop}
+           {background-attachment}. Setting the background-attachment to
+           \c{fixed} provides a background-image that does not scroll with the
+           viewport. Setting the background-attachment to \c{scroll}, scrolls
+           the background-image when the scroll bars move.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QAbstractScrollArea}
+           {Customizing QAbstractScrollArea} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QCheckBox \target qcheckbox-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The check indicator can be
+           styled using the \l{#indicator-sub}{::indicator}
+           subcontrol. By default, the indicator is placed in the Top
+           Left corner of the Contents rectangle of the widget.
+
+           The \l{#spacing-prop}{spacing} property
+           specifies the spacing between the check indicator and
+           the text.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QCheckBox}
+           {Customizing QCheckBox} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QColumnView \target qcolumnview-widget
+        \o The grip can be styled be using the \l{image-prop}{image} property.
+           The arrow indicators can by styled using the 
+           \l{left-arrow-sub}{::left-arrow} subcontrol and the 
+           \l{right-arrow-sub}{::right-arrow} subcontrol.
+
+    \row
+        \o QComboBox \target qcombobox-widget
+        \o The frame around the combobox can be styled using the 
+           \l{box model}. The drop-down button can be styled using
+           the \l{#drop-down-sub}{::drop-down} subcontrol. By default, the
+           drop-down button is placed in the top right corner of the padding
+           rectangle of the widget. The arrow mark inside the drop-down button 
+           can be styled using the \l{#down-arrow-sub}{::down-arrow} 
+           subcontrol. By default, the arrow is placed in the center of the 
+           contents rectangle of the drop-down subcontrol.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QComboBox}{Customizing QComboBox} 
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QDateEdit \target qdateedit-widget
+        \o See \l{#qspinbox-widget}{QSpinBox}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QDateTimeEdit \target qdatetimeedit-widget
+        \o See \l{#qspinbox-widget}{QSpinBox}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QDialog \target qdialog-widget
+        \o Supports only the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background},
+           \l{#background-clip-prop}{background-clip} and
+           \l{#background-origin-prop}{background-origin} properties.
+
+           \warning Make sure you define the Q_OBJECT macro for your custom
+           widget.
+
+    \row
+        \o QDialogButtonBox \target qdialogbuttonbox-widget
+        \o The layout of buttons can be altered using the
+           \l{#button-layout-prop}{button-layout} property.
+
+    \row
+        \o QDockWidget \target qdockwidget-widget
+        \o Supports styling of the title bar and the title bar buttons when docked.
+
+        The dock widget border can be styled using the \l{#border-prop}{border}
+        property. The \l{#title-sub}{::title} subcontrol can be used to customize
+        the title bar. The close and float buttons are positioned with respect
+        to the \l{title-sub}{::title} subcontrol using the 
+        \l{#close-button-sub}{::close-button} and
+        \l{#float-button-sub}{::float-button} respectively.
+
+        When the title bar is vertical, the \l{#vertical-ps}{:vertical} pseudo 
+        class is set. In addition, depending on QDockWidget::DockWidgetFeature,
+        the \l{#closable-ps}{:closable}, \l{#floatable-ps}{:floatable} and
+        \l{#movable-ps}{:movable} pseudo states are set.
+
+        \note Use QMainWindow::separator to style the resize handle.
+
+        \warning The style sheet has no effect when the QDockWidget is undocked
+        as Qt uses native top level windows when undocked.
+
+        See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QDockWidget}
+        {Customizing QDockWidget} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QDoubleSpinBox \target qdoublespinbox-widget
+        \o See \l{#qspinbox-widget}{QSpinBox}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QFrame \target qframe-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}.
+
+           Since 4.3, setting a stylesheet on a QLabel automatically
+           sets the QFrame::frameStyle property to QFrame::StyledPanel.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QFrame}{Customizing QFrame}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QGroupBox \target qgroupbox-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The title can be styled using the
+           \l{#title-sub}{::title} subcontrol. By default, the title is placed
+           depending on QGroupBox::textAlignment.
+
+           In the case of a checkable QGroupBox, the title includes the
+           check indicator. The indicator is styled using the 
+           the \l{#indicator-sub}{::indicator} subcontrol. The 
+           \l{#spacing-prop}{spacing} property can be used to control
+           the spacing between the text and indicator.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QGroupBox}{Customizing QGroupBox}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QHeaderView \target qheaderview-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The sections of the header view are
+           styled using the \l{#section-sub}{::section} sub control. The
+           \c{section} Sub-control supports the \l{#middle-ps}{:middle},
+           \l{#first-ps}{:first}, \l{#last-ps}{:last}, 
+           \l{#only-one-ps}{:only-one}, \l{#next-selected-ps}{:next-selected},
+           \l{#previous-selected-ps}{:previous-selected}, 
+           \l{#selected-ps}{:selected} pseudo states.
+
+           Sort indicator in can be styled using the 
+           \l{#up-arrow-sub}{::up-arrow} and the 
+           \l{#down-arrow-sub}{::down-arrow} Sub-control.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QHeaderView}{Customizing QHeaderView}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QLabel \target qlabel-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. Does not support the
+           \l{#hover-ps}{:hover} pseudo-state. 
+
+           Since 4.3, setting a stylesheet on a QLabel automatically
+           sets the QFrame::frameStyle property to QFrame::StyledPanel.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QFrame}{Customizing QFrame} for an
+           example (a QLabel derives from QFrame).
+
+    \row
+        \o QLineEdit \target qlineedit-widget
+        \o Support the \l{box model}.
+
+           The color and background of the selected item is styled using
+           \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color} and
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}
+           respectively.
+
+           The password character can be styled using the
+           \l{#lineedit-password-character-prop}{lineedit-password-character}
+           property.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QLineEdit}{Customizing QLineEdit}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QListView \target qlistview-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. When 
+           \l{QAbstractItemView::alternatingRowColors}{alternating row colors} 
+           is enabled, the alternating colors can be styled using the 
+           \l{#alternate-background-color-prop}{alternate-background-color}
+           property.
+
+           The color and background of the selected item is styled using
+           \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color} and
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}
+           respectively.
+
+           The selection behavior is controlled by the
+           \l{#show-decoration-selected-prop}{show-decoration-selected} property.
+
+           Use the \l{#item-sub}{::item} subcontrol for more fine grained
+           control over the items in the QListView.
+
+           See \l{qabstractscrollarea-widget}{QAbsractScrollArea} to
+           style scrollable backgrounds.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QListView}
+           {Customzing QListView} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QListWidget \target qlistwidget-widget
+        \o See \l{#qlistview-widget}{QListView}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QMainWindow \target qmainwindow-widget
+        \o Supports styling of the separator
+
+           The separator in a QMainWindow when using QDockWidget is styled
+           using the \l{#separator-sub}{::separator} subcontrol.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QMainWindow}{Customizing QMainWindow}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QMenu \target qmenu-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. 
+
+           Individual items are styled using the \l{#item-sub}{::item} 
+           subcontrol. In addition to the usually supported pseudo states,
+           \c{item} subcontrol supports the 
+           \l{#selected-ps}{:selected}, \l{#default-ps}{:default},
+           \l{#exclusive-ps}{:exclusive} and the 
+           \l{#non-exclusive-ps}{non-exclusive} pseudo states. 
+
+           The indicator of checkable menu items is styled using the
+           \l{#indicator-sub}{::indicator} subcontrol.
+
+           The separator is styled using the \l{#separator-sub}{::separator}
+           subcontrol.
+
+           For items with a sub menu, the arrow marks are styled using the
+           \l{::right-arrow-sub}{right-arrow} and 
+           \l{::left-arrow-sub}{left-arrow}.
+
+            The scroller is styled using the \l{#scroller-sub}{::scroller}.
+
+            The tear-off is styled using the \l{#tear-off-sub}{::tear-off}.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QMenu}{Customizing QMenu}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QMenuBar \target qmenubar-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The \l{#spacing-prop}{spacing}
+           property specifies the spacing between menu items.
+           Individual items are styled using the \l{#item-sub}{::item}
+           subcontrol.
+
+           \warning When running on Qt/Mac, the menu bar is usually embedded into the
+           system-wide menu bar. In this case, the style sheet will have no effect.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QMenuBar}{Customizing QMenuBar}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QMessageBox \target qmessagebox-widget
+        \o The \l{#messagebox-text-interaction-flags-prop}
+           {messagebox-text-interaction-flags} property can be used to alter
+           the interaction with text in the message box.
+
+    \row
+        \o QProgressBar \target qprogressbar-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The chunks of the progress bar
+           can be styled using the \l{#chunk-sub}{::chunk} subcontrol.
+           The chunk is displayed on the Contents rectangle of the widget.
+
+           If the progress bar displays text, use the \l{text-align-prop}{text-align}
+           property to position the text.
+
+           Indeterminate progress bars have the 
+           \l{#indeterminate-ps}{:indeterminate} pseudo state set.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QProgressBar}{Customizing QProgressBar}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QPushButton \target qpushbutton-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. Supports the \l{#default-ps}{:default},
+           \l{#flat-ps}{:flat}, \l{#checked-ps}{:checked} pseudo states.
+
+           For QPushButton with a menu, the menu indicator is styled
+           using the \l{#menu-indicator-sub}{::menu-indicator}
+           subcontrol. Appearance of checkable push buttons can be
+           customized using the \l{#open-ps}{:open} and 
+           \l{#closed-ps}{:closed} pseudo-states.
+
+           \warning If you only set a background-color on a QPushButton, the background
+           may not appear unless you set the border property to some value. This is
+           because, by default, the QPushButton draws a native border which completely
+           overlaps the background-color. For example,
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 30
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QPushButton}{Customizing QPushButton}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QRadioButton \target qradiobutton-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The check indicator can be
+           styled using the \l{#indicator-sub}{::indicator}
+           subcontrol. By default, the indicator is placed in the Top
+           Left corner of the Contents rectangle of the widget.
+
+           The \l{#spacing-prop}{spacing} property
+           specifies the spacing between the check indicator and
+           the text.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QRadioButton}
+           {Customizing QRadioButton} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QScrollBar \target qscrollbar-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The Contents rectangle of the widget
+           is considered to be the groove over which the slider moves. The extent
+           of the QScrollBar (i.e the width or the height depending on the orientation)
+           is set using the \l{#width-prop}{width} or \l{#height-prop}{height} property
+           respectively. To determine the orientation, use the 
+           \l{#horizontal-ps}{:horizontal} and the \l{vertical-ps}{:vertical}
+           pseudo states.
+
+           The slider can be styled using the \l{#handle-sub}{::handle} subcontrol.
+           Setting the \l{#min-width-prop}{min-width} or \l{#min-height-prop}{min-height}
+           provides size contraints for the slider depending on the orientation.
+
+           The \l{add-line-sub}{::add-line} subcontrol can be used to style the
+           button to add a line. By default, the add-line subcontrol is placed in 
+           top right corner of the Border rectangle of the widget. Depending on the
+           orientation the \l{#right-arrow-sub}{::right-arrow} or 
+           \l{#down-arrow-sub}{::down-arrow}. By default, the arrows are placed in 
+           the center of the Contents rectangle of the add-line subcontrol. 
+
+           The \l{sub-line-sub}{::sub-line} subcontrol can be used to style the
+           button to subtract a line. By default, the sub-line subcontrol is placed in 
+           bottom right corner of the Border rectangle of the widget. Depending on the
+           orientation the \l{#left-arrow-sub}{::left-arrow} or 
+           \l{#up-arrow-sub}{::up-arrow}. By default, the arrows are placed in 
+           the center of the Contents rectangle of the sub-line subcontrol. 
+
+           The \l{sub-page-sub}{::sub-page} subcontrol can be used to style the
+           region of the slider that subtracts a page. The \l{add-page-sub}{::add-page}
+           subcontrol can be used to style the region of the slider that adds a page.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QScrollBar}{Customizing QScrollBar} 
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QSizeGrip \target qsizegrip-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{#width-prop}{width},
+           \l{#height-prop}{height}, and \l{#image-prop}{image}
+           properties.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QSizeGrip}{Customizing QSizeGrip}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QSlider \target qslider-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. For horizontal slides, the 
+           \l{min-width-prop}{min-width} and \l{height-prop}{height}
+           properties must be provided. For vertical sliders, the 
+           \l{min-height-prop}{min-height} and \l{width-prop}{width}
+           properties must be provided.
+
+           The groove of the slider is styled 
+           using the \l{#groove-sub}{::groove}. The groove is 
+           positioned by default in the Contents rectangle of the widget. 
+           The thumb of the slider is styled using \l{#handle-sub}{::handle}
+           subcontrol. The subcontrol moves in the Contents rectangle of
+           the groove subcontrol.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QSlider}{Customizing QSlider}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QSpinBox \target qspinbox-widget
+        \o The frame of the spin box can be styled using the \l{box
+           model}. 
+
+           The up button and arrow can be styled using the 
+           \l{#up-button-sub}{::up-button} and
+           \l{#up-arrow-sub}{::up-arrow} subcontrols. By default,
+           the up-button is placed in the top right corner in the 
+           Padding rectangle of the widget. Without an explicit size,
+           it occupies half the height of its reference rectangle.
+           The up-arrow is placed in the center of the Contents
+           rectangle of the up-button.
+
+           The down button and arrow can be styled using the 
+           \l{#down-button-sub}{::down-button} and
+           \l{#down-arrow-sub}{::down-arrow} subcontrols. By default,
+           the down-button is placed in the bottom right corner in the 
+           Padding rectangle of the widget. Without an explicit size,
+           it occupies half the height of its reference rectangle.
+           The bottom-arrow is placed in the center of the Contents
+           rectangle of the bottom-button.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QSpinBox}{Customizing QSpinBox}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QSplitter \target qsplitter-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The handle of the splitter 
+           is styled using the \l{#handle-sub}{::handle} subcontrol.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QSplitter}{Customizing QSplitter}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QStatusBar \target qstatusbar-widget
+        \o Supports only the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}
+           {background} property.
+           The frame for individual items can be style using the
+           \l{#item-sub}{::item} subcontrol.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QStatusBar}{Customizing QStatusBar}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTabBar \target qtabbar-widget
+        \o Individual tabs may be styled using the \l{#tab-sub}{::tab}
+           subcontrol. The tabs support the
+           \l{#only-one-ps}{:only-one}, \l{#first-ps}{:first},
+           \l{#last-ps}{:last}, \l{#middle-ps}{:middle},
+           \l{#previous-selected-ps}{:previous--selected},
+           \l{#next-selected-ps}{:next-selected},
+           \l{#selected-ps}{:selected} pseudo states.
+
+            The \l{#top-ps}{:top}, \l{#left-ps}{:left}, \l{#right-ps}{:right},
+            \l{#bottom-ps}{:bottom} pseudo states depending on the orientation
+            of the tabs.
+
+            Overlapping tabs for the selected state are created by using
+            negative margins or using the \c{absolute} position scheme.
+
+            The tear indicator of the QTabBar is styled using the 
+            \l{#tear-sub}{::tear} subcontrol.
+
+            QTabBar used two QToolButtons for its scrollers that can be styled
+            using the \c{QTabBar QToolButton} selector. To specify the width
+            of the scroll button use the \l{#scroller-sub}{::scroller} 
+            subcontrol.
+
+            The alignment of the tabs within the QTabBar is styled
+            using the \l{#Alignment}{alignment} property. \warning 
+
+            To change the position of the QTabBar within a QTabWidget, use the
+            \l{#tab-bar-sub}{tab-bar} subcontrol (and set subcontrol-position).
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QTabWidget and QTabBar}{Customizing QTabBar}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTabWidget \target qtabwidget-widget
+        \o The frame of the tab widget is styled using the 
+           \l{#pane-sub}{::pane} subcontrol. The left and right
+           corners are styled using the \l{#left-corner-sub}{::left-corner}
+           and \l{#right-corner-sub}{::right-corner} respectively.
+           The position of the tab bar is controlled using the
+           \l{#tab-bar-sub}{::tab-bar} subcontrol.
+
+           By default, the subcontrols have positions of a QTabWidget in 
+           the QWindowsStyle. To place the QTabBar in the center, set the
+           subcontrol-position of the tab-bar subcontrol.
+
+            The \l{#top-ps}{:top}, \l{#left-ps}{:left}, \l{#right-ps}{:right},
+            \l{#bottom-ps}{:bottom} pseudo states depending on the orientation
+            of the tabs.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QTabWidget and QTabBar}
+           {Customizing QTabWidget} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTableView \target qtableview-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. When
+           \l{QAbstractItemView::alternatingRowColors}{alternating row colors} 
+           is enabled, the alternating colors can be styled using the 
+           \l{#alternate-background-color-prop}{alternate-background-color}
+           property.
+
+           The color and background of the selected item is styled using
+           \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color} and
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}
+           respectively.
+
+           The corner widget in a QTableView is implemented as a QAbstractButton
+           and can be styled using the "QTableView QTableCornerButton::section"
+           selector.
+
+           \warning If you only set a background-color on a QTableCornerButton, 
+           the background may not appear unless you set the border property to 
+           some value. This is because, by default, the QTableCornerButton draws a 
+           native border which completely overlaps the background-color. 
+
+           The color of the grid can be specified using the
+           \l{#gridline-color-prop}{gridline-color} property.
+
+           See \l{qabstractscrollarea-widget}{QAbsractScrollArea} to
+           style scrollable backgrounds.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QTableView}
+           {Customzing QTableView} for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTableWidget \target qtablewidget-widget
+        \o See \l{#qtableview-widget}{QTableView}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTextEdit \target qtextedit-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}.
+
+           The color and background of selected text is styled using
+           \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color} and
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}
+           respectively.
+
+           See \l{qabstractscrollarea-widget}{QAbsractScrollArea} to
+           style scrollable backgrounds.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTimeEdit \target qtimeedit-widget
+        \o See \l{#qspinbox-widget}{QSpinBox}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QToolBar \target qtoolbar-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. 
+
+           The \l{#top-ps}{:top}, \l{#left-ps}{:left}, \l{#right-ps}{:right},
+           \l{#bottom-ps}{:bottom} pseudo states depending on the area in
+           which the tool bar is grouped.
+
+           The \l{#first-ps}{:first}, \l{#last-ps}{:last}, \l{#middle-ps}{:middle},
+           \l{#only-one-ps}{:only-one} pseudo states indicator the position
+           of the tool bar within a line group (See 
+           QStyleOptionToolBar::positionWithinLine).
+
+           The separator of a QToolBar is styled using the 
+           \l{#separator-sub}{::separator} subcontrol.
+
+           The handle (to move the toolbar) is styled using the
+           \l{#handle-sub}{::handle} subcontrol.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QToolBar}{Customizing QToolBar} 
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QToolButton \target qtoolbutton-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}.
+
+           If the QToolButton has a menu, is 
+           \l{#menu-indicator-sub}{::menu-indicator} subcontrol can be used to
+           style the indicator. By default, the menu-indicator is positioned
+           at the bottom right of the Padding rectangle of the widget.
+
+           If the QToolButton is in QToolButton::MenuButtonPopup mode,
+           the \l{#menu-button-sub}{::menu-button} subcontrol is used to draw the
+           menu button. \l{#menu-arrow-sub}{::menu-arrow} subcontrol is used to
+           draw the menu arrow inside the menu-button. By default, it is
+           positioned in the center of the Contents rectangle of the
+           menu-button subcontrol.
+
+           When the QToolButton displays arrows, the \l{#up-arrow-sub}{::up-arrow},
+           \l{#down-arrow-sub}{::down-arrow}, \l{#left-arrow-sub}{::left-arrow}
+           and \l{#right-arrow-sub}{::right-arrow} subcontrols are used.
+
+           \warning If you only set a background-color on a QToolButton, the background
+           will not appear unless you set the border property to some value. This is
+           because, by default, the QToolButton draws a native border which completely
+           overlaps the background-color. For example,
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 31
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QToolButton}{Customizing QToolButton}
+           for an example.
+
+    \row
+        \o QToolBox \target qtoolbox-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. 
+
+          The individual tabs can by styled using the 
+          \l{#tab-sub}{::tab} subcontrol. The tabs support the
+          \l{#only-one-ps}{:only-one}, \l{#first-ps}{:first},
+          \l{#last-ps}{:last}, \l{#middle-ps}{:middle},
+         \l{#previous-selected-ps}{:previous-selected},
+          \l{#next-selected-ps}{:next-selected},
+          \l{#selected-ps}{:selected} pseudo states.
+
+    \row
+        \o QToolTip \target qtooltip-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. The \l{#opacity-prop}{opacity}
+           property controls the opacity of the tooltip.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QFrame}{Customizing QFrame}
+           for an example (a QToolTip is a QFrame).
+
+    \row
+        \o QTreeView \target qtreeview-widget
+        \o Supports the \l{box model}. When 
+           \l{QAbstractItemView::alternatingRowColors}{alternating row colors} 
+           is enabled, the alternating colors can be styled using the 
+           \l{#alternate-background-color-prop}{alternate-background-color}
+           property.
+
+           The color and background of the selected item is styled using
+           \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color} and
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}
+           respectively.
+
+           The selection behavior is controlled by the
+           \l{#show-decoration-selected-prop}{show-decoration-selected} property.
+
+           The branches of the tree view can be styled using the 
+           \l{#branch-sub}{::branch} subcontrol. The
+           ::branch Sub-control supports the \l{open-ps}{:open},
+           \l{closed-ps}{:closed}, \l{has-siblings-ps}{:has-sibling} and
+           \l{has-children-ps}{:has-children} pseudo states. 
+
+           Use the \l{#item-sub}{::item} subcontrol for more fine grained
+           control over the items in the QTreeView.
+
+           See \l{qabstractscrollarea-widget}{QAbsractScrollArea} to
+           style scrollable backgrounds.
+
+           See \l{Qt Style Sheets Examples#Customizing QTreeView}{Customizing QTreeView}
+           for an example to style the branches.
+
+    \row
+        \o QTreeWidget \target qtreewidget-widget
+        \o See \l{#qtreeview-widget}{QTreeView}.
+
+    \row
+        \o QWidget \target qwidget-widget
+        \o Supports only the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background},
+           \l{#background-clip-prop}{background-clip} and
+           \l{#background-origin-prop}{background-origin} properties.
+
+           If you subclass from QWidget, you need to provide a paintEvent for your
+           custom QWidget as below:
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 32
+
+           The above code is a no-operation if there is no stylesheet set.
+
+           \warning Make sure you define the Q_OBJECT macro for your custom 
+           widget.
+
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 List of Properties
+
+    The table below lists all the properties supported by Qt Style
+    Sheets. Which values can be given to an property depend on the
+    \l{List of Property Types}{property's type}. Unless otherwise
+    specified, properties below apply to all widgets. Properties
+    marked with an asterisk * are specific to Qt and have no equivalent
+    in CSS2 or CSS3.
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Property
+        \o Type
+        \o Description
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c alternate-background-color} \target alternate-background-color-prop
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The \l{QAbstractItemView::alternatingRowColors}
+           {alternate background color} used in QAbstractItemView subclasses.
+
+           If this property is not set, the default value is
+           whatever is set for the palette's
+           \l{QPalette::}{AlternateBase} role.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 33
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background} and
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c background} \target background-prop
+        \o \l{#Background}{Background}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the background. Equivalent
+           to specifying \c background-color, \c background-image, \c
+           background-repeat, and/or \c background-position.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QDialog, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit,
+           QMenu, QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter,
+           QTextEdit, QToolTip, and plain \l{QWidget}s.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 34
+
+
+           Often, it is required to set a fill pattern similar to the styles
+           in Qt::BrushStyle. You can use the background-color property for
+           Qt::SolidPattern, Qt::RadialGradientPattern, Qt::LinearGradientPattern
+           and Qt::ConicalGradientPattern.  The other patterns are easily achieved 
+           by creating a background image that contains the pattern.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 35
+
+           See also \l{#background-origin-prop}{background-origin},
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color},
+           \l{#background-clip-prop}{background-clip},
+           \l{#background-attachment-prop}{background-attachment}
+           and \l{#alternate-background-color-prop}{alternate-background-color}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c background-color \target background-color-prop
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The background color used for the widget.
+
+           Examples:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 36
+
+    \row
+        \o \c background-image \target background-image-prop
+        \o \l{#Url}{Url}
+        \o The background image used for the widget. Semi-transparent
+           parts of the image let the \c background-color shine
+           through.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 37
+
+    \row
+        \o \c background-repeat \target background-repeat-prop
+        \o \l{#Repeat}{Repeat}
+        \o Whether and how the background image is repeated to fill
+           the \c background-origin rectangle.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the background image
+           is repeated in both directions (\c repeat).
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 38
+
+    \row
+        \o \c background-position
+        \o \l{#Alignment}{Alignment}
+        \o The alignment of the background image within the \c
+           background-origin rectangle.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the alignment is \c
+           top \c left.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 39
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c background-attachment} \target background-attachment-prop
+        \o \l{#Attachment}{Attachment}
+        \o Determines whether the background-image in a QAbstractScrollArea
+           is scrolled or fixed with respect to the viewport.
+           By default, the background-image scrolls with the viewport.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 40
+
+        See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background}
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c background-clip} \target background-clip-prop
+        \o \l{#Origin}{Origin}
+        \o The widget's rectangle, in which the \c background is drawn.
+
+           This property specifies the rectangle to which the \c background-color
+           and \c background-image are clipped.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QDialog, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel,
+           QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit, QToolTip,
+           and plain \l{QWidget}s.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the default is \c
+           border.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 41
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background}, 
+           \l{#background-origin-prop}{background-origin} and \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c background-origin} \target background-origin-prop
+        \o \l{#Origin}{Origin}
+        \o The widget's background rectangle, to use in conjunction
+           with \c background-position and \c background-image.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QDialog, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel,
+           QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit, QToolTip,
+           and plain \l{QWidget}s.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the default is \c
+           padding.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 42
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background} and
+           \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c border} \target border-prop
+        \o \l{#Border}{Border}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the widget's border. Equivalent
+           to specifying \c border-color, \c border-style, and/or
+           \c border-width.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit,
+           QMenu, QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter,
+           QTextEdit, QToolTip, and plain \l{QWidget}s.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 43
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-top
+        \o \l{#Border}{Border}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the widget's top border.
+           Equivalent to specifying \c border-top-color, \c
+           border-top-style, and/or \c border-top-width.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-right
+        \o \l{#Border}{Border}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the widget's right border.
+           Equivalent to specifying \c border-right-color, \c
+           border-right-style, and/or \c border-right-width.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-bottom
+        \o \l{#Border}{Border}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the widget's bottom border.
+           Equivalent to specifying \c border-bottom-color, \c
+           border-bottom-style, and/or \c border-bottom-width.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-left
+        \o \l{#Border}{Border}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the widget's left border.
+           Equivalent to specifying \c border-left-color, \c
+           border-left-style, and/or \c border-left-width.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c border-color} \target border-attrs
+           \target border-color-prop
+        \o \l{#Box Colors}{Box Colors}
+        \o The color of all the border's edges. Equivalent to
+           specifying \c border-top-color, \c border-right-color, \c
+           border-bottom-color, and \c border-left-color.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit,
+           QMenu, QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter,
+           QTextEdit, QToolTip, and plain \l{QWidget}s.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to
+           \l{#color-prop}{color} (i.e., the widget's foreground
+           color).
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 44
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-style-prop}{border-style},
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-width-prop}{border-width},
+           \l{#border-image-prop}{border-image}, and \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-top-color
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The color of the border's top edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-right-color
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The color of the border's right edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-bottom-color
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The color of the border's bottom edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-left-color
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The color of the border's left edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c border-image} \target border-image-prop
+        \o \l{#Border Image}{Border Image}
+        \o The image used to fill the border. The image is cut into
+           nine parts and stretched appropriately if necessary. See
+           \l{#Border Image}{Border Image} for details.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit,
+           QMenu, QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter,
+           QTextEdit and QToolTip.
+
+           See also \l{#border-color-prop}{border-color},
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-style-prop}{border-style},
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-width-prop}{border-width}, and
+           \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c border-radius} \target border-radius-prop
+        \o \l{#Radius}{Radius}
+        \o The radius of the border's corners. Equivalent to
+           specifying \c border-top-left-radius, \c
+           border-top-right-radius, \c border-bottom-right-radius,
+           and \c border-bottom-left-radius.
+
+           The border-radius clips the element's 
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background}.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit,
+           and QToolTip.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to 0.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 45
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-width-prop}{border-width} and
+           \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-top-left-radius
+        \o \l{#Radius}{Radius}
+        \o The radius of the border's top-left corner.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-top-right-radius
+        \o \l{#Radius}{Radius}
+        \o The radius of the border's top-right corner.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-bottom-right-radius
+        \o \l{#Radius}{Radius}
+        \o The radius of the border's bottom-right corner. Setting
+           this property to a positive value results in a rounded
+           corner.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-bottom-left-radius
+        \o \l{#Radius}{Radius}
+        \o The radius of the border's bottom-left corner. Setting this
+           property to a positive value results in a rounded corner.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c border-style} \target border-style-prop
+        \o \l {Border Style}
+        \o The style of all the border's edges.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit,
+           and QToolTip.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to \c none.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 46
+
+           See also \l{#border-color-prop}{border-color},
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-style-prop}{border-style},
+           \l{#border-image-prop}{border-image}, and \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-top-style
+        \o \l{#Border Style}{Border Style}
+        \o The style of the border's top edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-right-style
+        \o \l{#Border Style}{Border Style}
+        \o The style of the border's right edge/
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-bottom-style
+        \o \l{#Border Style}{Border Style}
+        \o The style of the border's bottom edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-left-style
+        \o \l{#Border Style}{Border Style}
+        \o The style of the border's left edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c border-width} \target border-width-prop
+        \o \l{#Box Lengths}{Box Lengths}
+        \o The width of the border. Equivalent to setting \c
+           border-top-width, \c border-right-width, \c
+           border-bottom-width, and \c border-left-width.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit,
+           and QToolTip.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 47
+
+           See also \l{#border-color-prop}{border-color},
+           \l{#border-radius-prop}{border-radius},
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-style-prop}{border-style},
+           \l{#border-image-prop}{border-image}, and
+           \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-top-width
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The width of the border's top edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-right-width
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The width of the border's right edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-bottom-width
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The width of the border's bottom edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c border-left-width
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The width of the border's left edge.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c bottom} \target bottom-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c relative (the
+           default), moves a \l{subcontrol} by a certain offset up;
+           specifying \tt{bottom: \e{y}} is then equivalent to
+           specifying \tt{\l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#top-prop}{top}: -\e{y}}.
+
+           If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c absolute, the \c
+           bottom property specifies the subcontrol's bottom edge
+           in relation to the parent's bottom edge (see also
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}
+           {subcontrol-origin}).
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 48
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#left-prop}{left}, \l{#right-prop}{right}, and
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#top-prop}{top}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c button-layout} \target button-layout-prop
+        \o \l{#Number}{Number}
+        \o The layout of buttons in a QDialogButtonBox or
+           a QMessageBox. The possible values are 0
+           (\l{QDialogButtonBox::}{WinLayout}), 1
+           (\l{QDialogButtonBox::}{MacLayout}), 2
+           (\l{QDialogButtonBox::}{KdeLayout}), and 3
+           (\l{QDialogButtonBox::}{GnomeLayout}).
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_DialogButtonLayout} style hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 49
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c color} \target color-prop
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR 
+        \o The color used to render text.
+
+           This property is supported by all widgets that respect
+           the \l QWidget::palette.
+
+           If this property is not set, the default is whatever is
+           set for in the widget's palette for the
+           QWidget::foregroundRole (typically black).
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 50
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background} and
+           \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c dialogbuttonbox-buttons-have-icons}
+        \o \l{#Boolean}{Boolean}
+        \o Whether the buttons in a QDialogButtonBox show icons
+
+        If this property is set to 1, the buttons of a QDialogButtonBox
+        show icons; if it is set to 0, the icons are not shown.
+
+        See the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#list of icons}{List of Icons}
+        section for information on how to set icons.
+
+        \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 51
+
+        \note Styles defining this property must be applied before the
+        QDialogButtonBox is created; this means that you must apply the
+        style to the parent widget or to the application itself.
+
+    \omit
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c etch-disabled-text}*
+        \o \l{#Boolean}{Boolean}
+        \o Whether disabled text is drawn etched.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_EtchDisabledText} style hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 52
+    \endomit
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c font} \target font-prop
+        \o \l{#Font}{Font}
+        \o Shorthand notation for setting the text's font. Equivalent
+           to specifying \c font-family, \c font-size, \c font-style,
+           and/or \c font-weight.
+
+           This property is supported by all widgets that respect
+           the \l QWidget::font.
+
+           If this property is not set, the default is the
+           QWidget::font.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 53
+
+    \row
+        \o \c font-family
+        \o String
+        \o The font family.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 54
+
+    \row
+        \o \c font-size
+        \o \l{#Font Size}{Font Size}
+        \o The font size. In this version of Qt, only pt and px metrics are 
+           supported.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 55
+
+    \row
+        \o \c font-style
+        \o \l {Font Style}
+        \o The font style.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 56
+
+    \row
+        \o \c font-weight
+        \o \l{#Font Weight}{Font Weight}
+        \o The weight of the font.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c gridline-color}* \target gridline-color-prop
+        \o \l{#Color}{Color} \BR
+        \o The color of the grid line in a QTableView.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_Table_GridLineColor} style hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 57
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c height} \target height-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The height of a \l{subcontrol} (or in some case, a widget).
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to a value
+           that depends on the subcontrol/widget and on the current style.
+
+           \warning Unless otherwise specified, this property has no effect 
+           when set on widgets. If you want a widget with a fixed height, set
+           the \l{#min-width-prop}{min-height} and 
+           \l{#max-width-prop}{max-height} to the same value.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 58
+
+           See also \l{#width-prop}{width}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c icon-size} \target icon-size-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The width and height of the icon in a widget.
+
+           The icon size of the following widgets can be set using this 
+           property.
+               \list
+               \i QCheckBox
+               \i QListView
+               \i QPushButton
+               \i QRadioButton
+               \i QTabBar
+               \i QToolBar
+               \i QToolBox
+               \i QTreeView
+               \endlist
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c image}* \target image-prop
+        \o \l{#Url}{Url}+
+        \o The image that is drawn in the contents rectangle of a 
+           \l{subcontrol}. 
+
+           The image property accepts a list of \l{#Url}{Url}s or 
+           an \c{svg}. The actual image that is drawn is determined
+           using the same algorithm as QIcon (i.e) the image is never scaled
+           up but always scaled down if necessary. If a \c{svg} is specified,
+           the image is scaled to the size of the contents rectangle.
+
+           Setting the image property on sub controls implicitly sets the 
+           width and height of the sub-control (unless the image in a SVG).
+
+           In Qt 4.3 and later, the alignment of the
+           image within the rectangle can be specified using 
+           \l{image-position-prop}{image-position}.
+
+           \warning The QIcon SVG plugin is needed to render SVG images.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 59
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c image-position} \target image-position-prop
+        \o \l{#Alignment}{alignment}
+        \o In Qt 4.3 and later, the alignment of the image image's position can be specified
+           using relative or absolute position.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c left} \target left-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c relative (the
+           default), moves a \l{subcontrol} by a certain offset to
+           the right.
+
+           If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c absolute, the \c
+           left property specifies the subcontrol's left edge in
+           relation to the parent's left edge (see also
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin}).
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to \c 0.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 60
+
+           See also \l{#right-prop}{right}, \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#top-prop}{top}, and
+           \l{#bottom-prop}{bottom}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c lineedit-password- \BR \c character}* \target lineedit-password-character-prop
+        \o \l{#Number}{Number}
+        \o The QLineEdit password character as a Unicode number.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter} style hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 61
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c margin} \target margin-prop
+        \o \l {Box Lengths}
+        \o The widget's margins. Equivalent to specifying \c
+           margin-top, \c margin-right, \c margin-bottom, and \c
+           margin-left.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit,
+           and QToolTip.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to \c 0.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 62
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#padding-prop}{padding},
+           \l{#spacing-prop}{spacing}, and \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c margin-top
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's top margin.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c margin-right
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's right margin.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c margin-bottom
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's bottom margin.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c margin-left
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's left margin.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c max-height} \target max-height-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's or a subcontrol's maximum height.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSizeGrip, QSpinBox,
+           QSplitter, QStatusBar, QTextEdit, and QToolTip.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 63
+
+           See also \l{#max-width-prop}{max-width}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c max-width} \target max-width-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's or a subcontrol's maximum width.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSizeGrip, QSpinBox,
+           QSplitter, QStatusBar, QTextEdit, and QToolTip.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 64
+
+           See also \l{#max-height-prop}{max-height}.
+
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c messagebox-text- \target messagebox-text-interaction-flags-prop
+           \BR \c interaction-flags}*
+        \o \l{#Number}{Number}
+        \o The interaction behavior for text in a message box.
+           Possible values are based on Qt::TextInteractionFlags.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_MessageBox_TextInteractionFlags} style
+           hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 65
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c min-height} \target min-height-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's or a subcontrol's minimum height.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSizeGrip, QSpinBox,
+           QSplitter, QStatusBar, QTextEdit, and QToolTip.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the minimum height is
+           derived based on the widget's contents and the style.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 66
+
+           See also \l{#min-width-prop}{min-width}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c min-width} \target min-width-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's or a subcontrol's minimum width.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSizeGrip, QSpinBox,
+           QSplitter, QStatusBar, QTextEdit, and QToolTip.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the minimum width is
+           derived based on the widget's contents and the style.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 67
+
+           See also \l{#min-height-prop}{min-height}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c opacity}* \target opacity-prop
+        \o \l{#Number}{Number}
+        \o The opacity for a widget. Possible values are from 0
+           (transparent) to 255 (opaque). For the moment, this is
+           only supported for \l{QToolTip}{tooltips}.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_ToolTipLabel_Opacity} style hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 68
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c padding} \target padding-prop
+        \o \l{#Box Lengths}{Box Lengths}
+        \o The widget's padding. Equivalent to specifying \c
+           padding-top, \c padding-right, \c padding-bottom, and \c
+           padding-left.
+
+           This property is supported by QAbstractItemView
+           subclasses, QAbstractSpinBox subclasses, QCheckBox,
+           QComboBox, QFrame, QGroupBox, QLabel, QLineEdit, QMenu,
+           QMenuBar, QPushButton, QRadioButton, QSplitter, QTextEdit,
+           and QToolTip.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to \c 0.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 69
+
+           See also \l{#margin-prop}{margin},
+           \l{#spacing-prop}{spacing}, and \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c padding-top
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's top padding.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c padding-right
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's right padding.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c padding-bottom
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's bottom padding.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c padding-left
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The widget's left padding.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c paint-alternating-row-colors-for-empty-area} 
+            \target paint-alternating-row-colors-for-empty-area-prop
+        \o \c bool
+        \o Whether the QTreeView paints alternating row colors for the empty 
+           area (i.e the area where there are no items)
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c position} \target position-prop
+        \o \c relative \BR
+           | \c absolute
+        \o Whether offsets specified using \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#left-prop}{left},
+           \l{#right-prop}{right}, \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#top-prop}{top}, and
+           \l{#bottom-prop}{bottom} are relative or absolute
+           coordinates.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to \c
+           relative.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c right} \target right-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c relative (the
+           default), moves a \l{subcontrol} by a certain offset to
+           the left; specifying \tt{right: \e{x}} is then equivalent
+           to specifying \tt{\l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#left-prop}{left}: -\e{x}}.
+
+           If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c absolute, the \c
+           right property specifies the subcontrol's right edge in
+           relation to the parent's right edge (see also
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin}).
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 70
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#left-prop}{left}, \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#top-prop}{top}, and
+           \l{#bottom-prop}{bottom}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c selection-background-color}* \target selection-background-color-prop
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The background of selected text or items.
+
+           This property is supported by all widgets that respect
+           the \l QWidget::palette and that show selection text.
+
+           If this property is not set, the default value is
+           whatever is set for the palette's
+           \l{QPalette::}{Highlight} role.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 71
+
+           See also \l{#selection-color-prop}{selection-color} and
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c selection-color}* \target selection-color-prop
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+        \o The foreground of selected text or items.
+
+           This property is supported by all widgets that respect
+           the \l QWidget::palette and that show selection text.
+
+           If this property is not set, the default value is
+           whatever is set for the palette's
+           \l{QPalette::}{HighlightedText} role.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 72
+
+           See also
+           \l{#selection-background-color-prop}{selection-background-color}
+           and \l{#color-prop}{color}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c show-decoration- \target show-decoration-selected-prop
+           \BR \c selected}*
+        \o \l{#Boolean}{Boolean}
+        \o Controls whether selections in a QListView cover the
+           entire row or just the extent of the text.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to the
+           value specified by the current style for the
+           \l{QStyle::}{SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected} style
+           hint.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 73
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c spacing}* \target spacing-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o Internal spacing in the widget.
+
+           This property is supported by QCheckBox, checkable
+           \l{QGroupBox}es, QMenuBar, and QRadioButton.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the default value
+           depends on the widget and on the current style.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 74
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#padding-prop}{padding} and
+           \l{#margin-prop}{margin}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c subcontrol-origin}* \target subcontrol-origin-prop
+        \o \l{#Origin}{Origin}
+        \o The origin rectangle of the \l subcontrol within the
+           parent element.
+
+           If this property is not specified, the default is \c
+           padding.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 75
+
+           See also
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-position-prop}{subcontrol-position}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c subcontrol-position}* \target subcontrol-position-prop
+        \o \l{#Alignment}{Alignment}
+        \o The alignment of the \l subcontrol within the origin
+           rectangle specified by \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}
+           {subcontrol-origin}.
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to a value
+           that depends on the subcontrol.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 76
+
+           See also
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c text-align} \target text-align-prop
+        \o \l{#Alignment}{Alignment}
+        \o The alignment of text and icon within the contents of the widget.
+
+           If this value is not specified, it defaults to the value
+           that depends on the native style.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 77
+
+            This property is currently supported only by QPushButton 
+            and QProgressBar.
+
+    \row    
+        \o \bold{\c text-decoration}
+        \o \c none \BR
+           \c underline \BR
+           \c overline \BR
+           \c line-through
+        \o Additional text effects
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c top} \target top-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c relative (the
+           default), moves a \l{subcontrol} by a certain offset
+           down.
+
+           If \l{#position-prop}{position} is \c absolute, the \c top
+           property specifies the subcontrol's top edge in relation
+           to the parent's top edge (see also
+           \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin}).
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to \c 0.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 78
+
+           See also \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#left-prop}{left}, \l{#right-prop}{right}, and
+           \l{#bottom-prop}{bottom}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{\c width} \target width-prop
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}
+        \o The width of a \l{subcontrol} (or a widget in some cases).
+
+           If this property is not specified, it defaults to a value
+           that depends on the subcontrol/widget and on the current style.
+
+           \warning Unless otherwise specified, this property has no effect 
+           when set on widgets. If you want a widget with a fixed width, set
+           the \l{#min-width-prop}{min-width} and 
+           \l{#max-width-prop}{max-width} to the same value.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 79
+
+           See also \l{#height-prop}{height}.
+
+    \endtable
+
+    \target list of icons
+    \section1 List of Icons
+
+    Icons used in Qt can be customized using the following properties. Each of
+    the properties listed in this section have the type \l{#Icon}{Icon}.
+
+    Note that for icons to appear in buttons in a QDialogButtonBox, you need to
+    set the dialogbuttonbox-buttons-have-icons property to true. Also, to
+    customize the size of the icons, use the icon-size property.
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Name
+        \o QStyle::StandardPixmap
+
+    \row
+        \o backward-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ArrowBack
+
+    \row
+        \o cd-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DriveCDIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o computer-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ComputerIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o desktop-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DesktopIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-apply-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogApplyButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-cancel-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogCancelButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-close-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogCloseButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-discard-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogDiscardButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-help-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogHelpButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-no-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogNoButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-ok-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogOkButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-open-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogOpenButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-reset-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogResetButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-save-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogSaveButton
+
+    \row
+        \o dialog-yes-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DialogYesButton
+
+    \row
+        \o directory-closed-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DirClosedIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o directory-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DirIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o directory-link-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DirLinkIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o directory-open-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DirOpenIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o dockwidget-close-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DockWidgetCloseButton
+
+    \row
+        \o downarrow-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ArrowDown
+
+    \row
+        \o dvd-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DriveDVDIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o file-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o file-link-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileLinkIcon
+
+    \omit
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-backward-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogBack
+    \endomit
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-contentsview-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogContentsView
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-detailedview-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogDetailedView
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-end-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogEnd
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-infoview-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogInfoView
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-listview-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogListView
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-new-directory-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogNewFolder
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-parent-directory-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_FileDialogToParent
+
+    \row
+        \o filedialog-start-icon
+        \o  QStyle::SP_FileDialogStart
+
+    \row
+        \o floppy-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DriveFDIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o forward-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ArrowForward
+
+    \row
+        \o harddisk-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DriveHDIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o home-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DirHomeIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o leftarrow-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ArrowLeft
+
+    \row
+        \o messagebox-critical-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_MessageBoxCritical
+
+    \row
+        \o messagebox-information-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_MessageBoxInformation
+
+    \row
+        \o messagebox-question-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_MessageBoxQuestion
+
+    \row
+        \o messagebox-warning-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_MessageBoxWarning
+
+    \row
+        \o network-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_DriveNetIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o rightarrow-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ArrowRight
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-contexthelp-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarContextHelpButton
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-maximize-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarMaxButton
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-menu-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarMenuButton
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-minimize-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarMinButton
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-normal-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarNormalButton
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-shade-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarShadeButton
+
+    \row
+        \o titlebar-unshade-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton
+
+    \row
+        \o trash-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_TrashIcon
+
+    \row
+        \o uparrow-icon
+        \o QStyle::SP_ArrowUp
+
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 List of Property Types
+
+    The following table summarizes the syntax and meaning of the
+    different property types.
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Type
+        \o Syntax
+        \o Description
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Alignment \target Alignment
+        \o \{ \c top \BR
+           | \c bottom \BR
+           | \c left \BR
+           | \c right \BR
+           | \c center \}*
+        \o Horizontal and/or vertical alignment.
+
+           Example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 80
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Attachment \target Attachment
+        \o \{ \c scroll \BR
+           | \c fixed \}*
+        \o Scroll or fixed attachment.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Background \target Background
+        \o \{ \l{#Brush}{Brush} \BR
+           | \l{#Url}{Url} \BR
+           | \l{#Repeat}{Repeat} \BR
+           | \l{#Alignment}{Alignment} \}*
+        \o A sequence of \l{#Brush}{Brush}, \l{#Url}{Url},
+           \l{#Repeat}{Repeat}, and \l{#Alignment}{Alignment}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Boolean \target Boolean
+        \o 0 | 1
+        \o True (\c 1) or false (\c 0).
+
+           Example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 81
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Border \target Border
+        \o \{ \l{#Border Style}{Border Style} \BR
+           | \l{#Length}{Length} \BR
+           | \l{#Brush}{Brush} \}*
+        \o Shorthand border property.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Border \target Border Image
+           Image}
+        \o \c none \BR
+           | \l{Url} \l{Number}\{4\} \BR (\c stretch | \c repeat){0,2}
+        \o A border image is an image that is composed of nine parts
+           (top left, top center, top right, center left, center,
+           center right, bottom left, bottom center, and bottom
+           right). When a border of a certain size is required, the
+           corner parts are used as is, and the top, right, bottom,
+           and left parts are stretched or repeated to produce a
+           border with the desired size.
+
+           See the
+           \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-background/#the-border-image}
+           {CSS3 Draft Specification} for details.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Border \target Border Style
+           Style}
+        \o \c dashed \BR
+           | \c dot-dash \BR
+           | \c dot-dot-dash \BR
+           | \c dotted \BR
+           | \c double \BR
+           | \c groove \BR
+           | \c inset \BR
+           | \c outset \BR
+           | \c ridge \BR
+           | \c solid \BR
+           | \c none
+        \o Specifies the pattern used to draw a border.
+           See the \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-background/#border-style}
+           {CSS3 Draft Specification} for details.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Box \target Box Colors 
+        Colors}
+        \o \l{#Brush}{Brush}\{1,4\}
+        \o One to four occurrences of \l{#Brush}{Brush}, specifying the top,
+           right, bottom, and left edges of a box, respectively. If
+           the left color is not specified, it is taken to be the
+           same as the right color. If the bottom color is not
+           specified, it is taken to be the same as the top color. If
+           the right color is not specified, it is taken to be the
+           same as the top color.
+
+           Example:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 82
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Box \target Box Lengths
+           Lengths}
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}\{1,4\}
+        \o One to four occurrences of \l{#Length}{Length}, specifying the
+           top, right, bottom, and left edges of a box,
+           respectively. If the left length is not specified, it is
+           taken to be the same as the right length. If the bottom
+           length is not specified, is it taken to be the same as the
+           top length. If the right length is not specified, it is
+           taken to be the same as the top length.
+
+           Examples:
+
+           \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 83
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Brush \target Brush
+        \o \l{#Color}{Color} \BR
+           | \l{Gradient} \BR
+           | \l{PaletteRole}
+        \o Specifies a Color or a Gradient or an entry in the Palette.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Color \target Color
+        \o \tt{rgb(\e{r}, \e{g}, \e{b})} \BR
+           | \tt{rgba(\e{r}, \e{g}, \e{b}, \e{a})} \BR
+           | \tt{hsv(\e{h}, \e{s}, \e{v})} \BR
+           | \tt{hsva(\e{h}, \e{s}, \e{v}, \e{a})} \BR
+           | \tt{#\e{rrggbb}} \BR
+           | \l{QColor::setNamedColor()}{Color Name} \BR
+        \o Specifies a color as RGB (red, green, blue) or RGBA
+           (red, green, blue, alpha) or HSV (hue, saturation, value) or HSVA 
+           (hue, saturation, value, alpha) or a named color. The \c rgb() or \c rgba()
+           syntax can be used with integer values between 0 and 255, or with
+           percentages. The value of s, v, and a in \c hsv() or \c hsva() must all 
+           be in the range 0-255; the value of h must be in the range 0-359.
+
+           Examples:
+
+            \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 84
+
+            \note The RGB colors allowed are the same as those allowed with
+            CSS 2.1, as listed
+            \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#color-units}{here}. 
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Font \target Font
+        \o (\l{#Font Style}{Font Style} | \l{#Font Weight}{Font Weight}){0,2} \l{#Font Size}{Font Size} String
+        \o Shorthand font property.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Font \target Font Size
+           Size}
+        \o \l{Length}
+        \o The size of a font.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Font \target Font Style
+           Style}
+        \o \c normal \BR
+           | \c italic \BR
+           | \c oblique
+        \o The style of a font.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold{Font \target Font Weight
+           Weight}
+        \o \c normal \BR
+           | \c bold \BR
+           | \c 100 \BR
+           | \c 200 \BR
+           ... \BR
+           | \c 900
+        \o The weight of a font.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Gradient \target Gradient
+        \o \c qlineargradient \BR
+           | \c qradialgradient \BR
+           | \c qconicalgradient
+        \o Specifies gradient fills. There are three types of gradient fills:
+
+           \list
+           \o \e{Linear} gradients interpolate colors between start and
+              end points.
+           \o \e{Radial} gradients interpolate colors between a focal
+              point and end points on a circle surrounding it.
+           \o \e{Conical} gradients interpolate colors around a center
+              point.
+           \endlist
+
+        Gradients are specified in Object Bounding Mode. Imagine the box 
+        in which the gradient is rendered, to have its top left corner at (0, 0)
+        and its bottom right corner at (1, 1). Gradient parameters are
+        then specified as percentages from 0 to 1. These values are 
+        extrapolated to actual box coordinates at runtime. It is possible
+        specify values that lie outside the bounding box (-0.6 or 1.8, for
+        instance).
+
+        \warning The stops have to appear sorted in ascending order.
+
+        Examples:
+
+        \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 85
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Icon \target Icon
+        \o (\l{#Url}{Url} (\c disabled | \c active | \c normal | \c selected)?
+            (\c on | \c off)? )*
+        \o A list of url, QIcon::Mode and QIcon::State.
+
+            Example:
+            \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 86
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Length \target Length
+        \o \l{#Number}{Number} (\c px | \c pt | \c em | \c ex)?
+        \o A number followed by a measurement unit. The CSS standard recommends
+           that user agents must 
+           \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#illegalvalues}{ignore}
+           a declaration with an illegal value. In Qt, it is mandatory to 
+           specify measurement units. For compatibility with earlier versions 
+           of Qt, numbers without measurement units are treated as pixels 
+           in most contexts. The supported units are:
+
+           \list
+           \o \c px: pixels
+           \o \c pt: the size of one point (i.e., 1/72 of an inch)
+           \o \c em: the em width of the font (i.e., the width of 'M')
+           \o \c ex: the ex width of the font (i.e., the height of 'x')
+           \endlist
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Number \target Number
+        \o A decimal integer or a real number
+        \o Examples: \c 0, \c 18, \c +127, \c -255, \c 12.34, \c -.5,
+           \c 0009.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Origin \target Origin
+        \o \c margin \BR
+           | \c border \BR
+           | \c padding \BR
+           | \c content
+        \o Indicates which of four rectangles to use.
+
+           \list
+           \o \c margin: The margin rectangle. The margin falls outside the border.
+           \o \c border: The border rectangle. This is where any border is drawn.
+           \o \c padding: The padding rectangle. Unlike the margins,
+                          padding is located inside the border.
+           \o \c content: The content rectangle. This specifies where
+                          the actual contents go, excluding any
+                          padding, border, or margin.
+           \endlist
+
+           See also \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold PaletteRole \target PaletteRole
+        \o \c alternate-base \BR
+              | \c base \BR
+              | \c bright-text \BR
+              | \c button \BR
+              | \c button-text \BR
+              | \c dark \BR
+              | \c highlight \BR
+              | \c highlighted-text \BR
+              | \c light \BR
+              | \c link \BR
+              | \c link-visited \BR
+              | \c mid \BR
+              | \c midlight \BR
+              | \c shadow \BR
+              | \c text \BR
+              | \c window \BR
+              | \c window-text \BR
+        \o These values correspond the \l{QPalette::ColorRole}{Color roles} 
+           in the widget's QPalette.
+
+            For example,
+            \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 87
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Radius \target Radius
+        \o \l{#Length}{Length}\{1, 2\}
+        \o One or two occurrences of \l{#Length}{Length}. If only one length is
+           specified, it is used as the radius of the quarter circle
+           defining the corner. If two lengths are specified, the
+           first length is the horizontal radius of a quarter
+           ellipse, whereas the second length is the vertical radius.
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Repeat \target Repeat
+        \o \c repeat-x \BR
+           | \c repeat-y \BR
+           | \c repeat \BR
+           | \c no-repeat
+        \o A value indicating the nature of repetition.
+
+           \list
+           \o \c repeat-x: Repeat horizontally.
+           \o \c repeat-y: Repeat vertically.
+           \o \c repeat: Repeat horizontally and vertically.
+           \o \c no-repeat: Don't repeat.
+           \endlist
+
+    \row
+        \o \bold Url \target Url
+        \o \tt{url(\e{filename})}
+        \o \tt{\e{filename}} is the name of a file on the local disk
+           or stored using \l{the Qt Resource System}. Setting an
+           image implicitly sets the width and height of the element.
+
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 List of Pseudo-States
+
+    The following pseudo-states are supported:
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Pseudo-State
+        \o Description
+
+    \row \o \c :active \target active
+          \o This state is set when the widget resides in an active window.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :adjoins-item \target adjoins-item-ps
+        \o This state is set when the \l{#branch-sub}{::branch} of a QTreeView
+           is adjacent to an item.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :alternate \target alternate-ps
+        \o This state is set for every alternate row whe painting the row of
+           a QAbstractItemView when QAbstractItemView::alternatingRowColors()
+           is  set to true.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :bottom \target bottom-ps
+        \o The item is positioned at the bottom. For example, a QTabBar
+           that has its tabs positioned at the bottom.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :checked \target checked-ps
+        \o The item is checked. For example, the 
+            \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{checked} state of QAbstractButton.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :closable \target closable-ps
+        \o The items can be closed. For example, the QDockWidget has the
+           QDockWidget::DockWidgetClosable feature turned on.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :closed \target closed-ps
+        \o The item is in the closed state. For example, an non-expanded 
+           item in a QTreeView
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :default \target default-ps
+        \o The item is the default. For example, a 
+           \l{QPushButton::default}{default} QPushButton or a default action
+           in a QMenu.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :disabled \target disabled-ps
+        \o The item is \l{QWidget::enabled}{disabled}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :editable \target editable-ps
+        \o The QComboBox is editable.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :edit-focus \target edit-focus-ps
+        \o The item has edit focus (See QStyle::State_HasEditFocus). This state 
+           is available only for Qt Extended applications.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :enabled \target enabled-ps
+        \o The item is \l{QWidget::enabled}{enabled}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :exclusive \target exclusive-ps
+        \o The item is part of an exclusive item group. For example, a menu
+           item in a exclusive QActionGroup.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :first \target first-ps
+        \o The item is the first (in a list). For example, the first
+           tab in a QTabBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :flat \target flat-ps
+        \o The item is flat. For example, a
+           \l{QPushButton::flat}{flat} QPushButton.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :floatable \target floatable-ps
+        \o The items can be floated. For example, the QDockWidget has the
+           QDockWidget::DockWidgetFloatable feature turned on.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :focus \target focus-ps
+        \o The item has \l{QWidget::hasFocus()}{input focus}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :has-children \target has-children-ps
+        \o The item has children. For example, an item in a
+           QTreeView that has child items.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :has-siblings \target has-siblings-ps
+        \o The item has siblings. For example, an item in a
+           QTreeView that siblings.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :horizontal \target horizontal-ps
+        \o The item has horizontal orientation
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :hover \target hover-ps
+        \o The mouse is hovering over the item.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :indeterminate \target indeterminate-ps
+        \o The item has indeterminate state. For example, a QCheckBox 
+           or QRadioButton is \l{Qt::PartiallyChecked}{partially checked}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :last \target last-ps
+        \o The item is the last (in a list). For example, the last
+           tab in a QTabBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :left \target left-ps
+        \o The item is positioned at the left. For example, a QTabBar
+           that has its tabs positioned at the left.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :maximized \target maximized-ps
+        \o The item is maximized. For example, a maximized QMdiSubWindow.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :middle \target middle-ps
+        \o The item is in the middle (in a list). For example, a tab
+           that is not in the beginning or the end in a QTabBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :minimized \target minimized-ps
+        \o The item is minimized. For example, a minimized QMdiSubWindow.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :movable \target movable-ps
+        \o The item can be moved around. For example, the QDockWidget has the
+           QDockWidget::DockWidgetMovable feature turned on.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :no-frame \target no-frame-ps
+        \o The item has no frame. For example, a frameless QSpinBox
+           or QLineEdit.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :non-exclusive \target non-exclusive-ps
+        \o The item is part of a non-exclusive item group. For example, a menu
+           item in a non-exclusive QActionGroup.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :off \target off-ps
+        \o For items that can be toggled, this applies to items
+           in the "off" state.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :on \target on-ps
+        \o For items that can be toggled, this applies to widgets
+           in the "on" state. 
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :only-one \target only-one-ps
+        \o The item is the only one (in a list). For example, a lone tab
+           in a QTabBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :open \target open-ps
+        \o The item is in the open state. For example, an expanded 
+           item in a QTreeView, or a QComboBox or QPushButton with
+           an open menu.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :next-selected \target next-selected-ps
+        \o The next item (in a list) is selected. For example, the
+           selected tab of a QTabBar is next to this item.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :pressed \target pressed-ps
+        \o The item is being pressed using the mouse.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :previous-selected \target previous-selected-ps
+        \o The previous item (in a list) is selected. For example, a
+           tab in a QTabBar that is next to the selected tab.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :read-only \target read-only-ps
+        \o The item is marked read only or non-editable. For example,
+           a read only QLineEdit or a non-editable QComboBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :right \target right-ps
+        \o The item is positioned at the right. For example, a QTabBar
+           that has its tabs positioned at the right.
+
+    \row 
+        \o \c :selected \target selected-ps
+        \o The item is selected. For example, the selected tab in
+           a QTabBar or the selected item in a QMenu.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :top \target top-ps
+        \o The item is positioned at the top. For example, a QTabBar
+           that has its tabs positioned at the top.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :unchecked \target unchecked-ps
+        \o The item is
+           \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{unchecked}.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :vertical \target vertical-ps
+        \o The item has vertical orientation.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c :window \target window-ps
+        \o The widget is a window (i.e top level widget)
+
+    \endtable
+
+    \target subcontrols
+    \section1 List of Sub-Controls
+
+    The following subcontrols are available:
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header
+        \o Sub-Control
+        \o Description
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::add-line \target add-line-sub
+        \o The button to add a line of a QScrollBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::add-page \target add-page-sub
+        \o The region between the handle (slider) and the \l{#add-line-sub}{add-line}
+           of a QScrollBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::branch \target branch-sub
+        \o The branch indicator of a QTreeView.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::chunk \target chunk-sub
+        \o The progress chunk of a QProgressBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::close-button \target close-button-sub
+        \o The close button of a QDockWidget.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::corner \target corner-sub
+        \o The corner between two scrollbars in a QAbstractScrollArea
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::down-arrow \target down-arrow-sub
+        \o The down arrow of a QComboBox, QHeaderView (sort indicator),
+           QScrollBar or QSpinBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::down-button \target down-button-sub
+        \o  The down button of a QScrollBar or a QSpinBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::drop-down \target drop-down-sub
+        \o The drop-down button of a QComboBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::float-button \target float-button-sub
+        \o The float button of a QDockWidget
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::groove \target groove-sub
+        \o The groove of a QSlider.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::indicator \target indicator-sub
+        \o The indicator of a QAbstractItemView, a QCheckBox, a QRadioButton, 
+           a checkable QMenu item or a checkable QGroupBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::handle \target handle-sub
+        \o The handle (slider) of a QScrollBar, a QSplitter, or a QSlider.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::icon \target icon-sub
+        \o The icon of a QAbstractItemView or a QMenu.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::item \target item-sub
+        \o An item of a QAbstractItemView, a QMenuBar, a QMenu, or 
+        a QStatusBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::left-arrow \target left-arrow-sub
+        \o The left arrow of a QScrollBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::left-corner \target left-corner-sub
+        \o The left corner of a QTabWidget. For example, this control can be
+           used to control position the left corner widget in a QTabWidget.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::menu-arrow \target menu-arrow-sub
+        \o The arrow of a QToolButton with a menu.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::menu-button \target menu-button-sub
+        \o The menu button of a QToolButton.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::menu-indicator \target menu-indicator-sub
+        \o The menu indicator of a QPushButton.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::right-arrow \target right-arrow-sub
+        \o The right arrow of a QMenu or a QScrollBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::pane \target pane-sub
+        \o The pane (frame) of a QTabWidget.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::right-corner \target right-corner-sub
+        \o The right corner of a QTabWidget. For example, this control can be
+           used to control the position the right corner widget in a QTabWidget.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::scroller \target scroller-sub
+        \o The scroller of a QMenu or QTabBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::section \target section-sub
+        \o The section of a QHeaderView.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::separator \target separator-sub
+        \o The separator of a QMenu or in a QMainWindow.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::sub-line \target sub-line-sub
+        \o The button to subtract a line of a QScrollBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::sub-page \target sub-page-sub
+        \o The region between the handle (slider) and the \l{#sub-line-sub}{sub-line}
+           of a QScrollBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::tab \target tab-sub
+        \o The tab of a QTabBar or QToolBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::tab-bar \target tab-bar-sub
+        \o The tab bar of a QTabWidget. This subcontrol exists only to
+           control the position of the QTabBar inside the QTabWidget. To
+           style the tabs using the \l{#tab-sub}{::tab} subcontrol.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::tear \target tear-sub
+        \o The tear indicator of a QTabBar.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::tear-off \target tear-off-sub
+        \o The tear-off indicator of a QMenu.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::text \target text-ps
+        \o The text of a QAbstractItemView.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::title \target title-sub
+        \o The title of a QGroupBox or a QDockWidget.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::up-arrow \target up-arrow-sub
+        \o The up arrow of a QHeaderView (sort indicator), QScrollBar 
+           or a QSpinBox.
+
+    \row
+        \o \c ::up-button \target up-button-sub
+        \o The up button of a QSpinBox.
+
+    \endtable
+
+    See \l{Customizing the QPushButton's Menu Indicator Sub-Control}
+    for an example of how to customize a subcontrol.
+    */
+
+/*!
+    \page stylesheet-examples.html
+    \contentspage {Qt Style Sheet}{Contents}
+    \previouspage Qt Style Sheets Reference
+    \title Qt Style Sheets Examples
+
+    We will now see a few examples to get started with using Qt Style Sheets.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+    \section1 Style Sheet Usage
+
+    \section2 Customizing the Foreground and Background Colors
+
+    Let's start by setting yellow as the background color of all
+    \l{QLineEdit}s in an application. This could be achieved like
+    this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 88
+
+    If we want the property to apply only to the \l{QLineEdit}s that are
+    children (or grandchildren or grand-grandchildren) of a specific dialog,
+    we would rather do this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 89
+
+    If we want the property to apply only to one specific QLineEdit,
+    we can give it a name using QObject::setObjectName() and use an
+    ID Selector to refer to it:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 90
+
+    Alternatively, we can set the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-prop}{background-color} property directly on the
+    QLineEdit, omitting the selector:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 91
+
+    To ensure a good contrast, we should also specify a suitable
+    color for the text:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 92
+
+    It might be a good idea to change the colors used for selected
+    text as well:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 93
+
+
+    \section2 Customizing Using Dynamic Properties
+
+    There are many situations where we need to present a form that
+    has mandatory fields. To indicate to the user that the field is
+    mandatory, one effective (albeit esthetically dubious) solution
+    is to use yellow as the background color for those fields. It
+    turns out this is very easy to implement using Qt Style Sheets.
+    First, we would use the following application-wide style sheet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 94
+
+    This means that every widget whose \c mandatoryField Qt property
+    is set to true would have a yellow background.
+
+    Then, for each mandatory field widget, we would simply create a
+    \c mandatoryField property on the fly and set it to true. For
+    example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 95
+
+    \section2 Customizing a QPushButton Using the Box Model
+
+    This time, we will show how to create a red QPushButton. This
+    QPushButton would presumably be connected to a very destructive
+    piece of code.
+
+    First, we are tempted to use this style sheet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 96
+
+    However, the result is a boring, flat button with no borders:
+
+    \image stylesheet-redbutton1.png A flat red button
+
+    What happened is this:
+
+    \list
+    \o We have made a request that cannot be satisfied using the
+       native styles alone (e.g., the Windows XP theme engine doesn't
+       let us specify the background color of a button).
+    \o Therefore, the button is rendered using style sheets.
+    \o We haven't specified any values for
+       \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-width-prop}{border-width} and
+       \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-style-prop}{border-style}, so by default we obtain
+       a 0-pixel wide border of style \c none.
+    \endlist
+
+    Let's improve the situation by specifying a border:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 97
+
+    \image stylesheet-redbutton2.png A red button with a beige border
+
+    Things look already a lot better. But the button looks a bit
+    cramped. Let's specify some spacing between the border and the
+    text using the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#padding-prop}{padding}. Additionally, we will
+    enforce a minimum width, round the corners, and specify a larger
+    font to make the button look nicer:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 98
+
+    \image stylesheet-redbutton3.png A red button with a round beige border and big, bold text
+
+    The only issue remaining is that the button doesn't react when we
+    press it. We can fix this by specifying a slightly different
+    background color and use a different border style.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 99
+
+    \section2 Customizing the QPushButton's Menu Indicator Sub-Control
+
+    Subcontrols give access to the sub-elements of a widget. For
+    example, a QPushButton associated with a menu (using
+    QPushButton::setMenu()) has a menu indicator. Let's customize
+    the menu indicator for the red push button:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 100
+
+    By default, the menu indicator is located at the bottom-right
+    corner of the padding rectangle. We can change this by specifying
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-position-prop}{subcontrol-position} and
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin} to anchor the
+    indicator differently. We can also use \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#top-prop}{top} and
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#left-prop}{left} to move the indicator by a few pixels. For
+    example:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 101
+
+    This positions the \c myindicator.png to the center right of the
+    QPushButton's \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#padding-prop}{padding} rectangle (see
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#subcontrol-origin-prop}{subcontrol-origin} for more
+    information).
+
+    \section2 Complex Selector Example
+
+    Since red seems to be our favorite color, let's make the text in
+    QLineEdit red by setting the following application-wide
+    stylesheet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 102
+
+    However, we would like to give a visual indication that a
+    QLineEdit is read-only by making it appear gray:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 103
+
+    At some point, our design team comes with the requirement that
+    all \l{QLineEdit}s in the registration form (with the
+    \l{QObject::objectName}{object name} \c registrationDialog) to be
+    brown:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 104
+
+    A few UI design meetings later, we decide that all our
+    \l{QDialog}s should have brown colored \l{QLineEdit}s:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 105
+
+    Quiz: What happens if we have a read-only QLineEdit in a QDialog?
+    [Hint: The \l{The Style Sheet Syntax#Conflict Resolution}{Conflict Resolution} section above explains
+    what happens in cases like this.]
+
+    \section1 Customizing specific widgets
+
+    This section provides examples to customize specific widgets using Style Sheets.
+
+    \section2 Customizing QAbstractScrollArea
+
+    The background of any QAbstractScrollArea (Item views, QTextEdit 
+    and QTextBrowser) can be set using the background properties. For example,
+    to set a background-image that scrolls with the scroll bar:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 106
+
+    If the background-image is to be fixed with the viewport:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 107
+
+    \section2 Customizing QCheckBox
+
+    Styling of a QCheckBox is almost indentical to styling a QRadioButton. The
+    main difference is that a tristate QCheckBox has an indeterminate state.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 108
+
+    \section2 Customizing QComboBox
+
+    We will look at an example where the drop down button of a QComboBox
+    appears "merged" with the combo box frame.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 109
+
+    The pop-up of the QComboBox is a QAbstractItemView and is styled using 
+    the descendant selector:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 110
+
+    \section2 Customizing QDockWidget
+
+    The title bar and the buttons of a QDockWidget can be customized as 
+    follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 111
+
+    If one desires to move the dock widget buttons to the left, the following
+    style sheet can be used:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 112
+
+    \note To customize the separator (resize handle) of a QDockWidget,
+    use QMainWindow::separator.
+
+    \section2 Customizing QFrame
+
+    A QFrame is styled using the \l{The Box Model}.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 113
+
+    \section2 Customizing QGroupBox
+    
+    Let us look at an example that moves the QGroupBox's title to
+    the center.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 114
+
+    For a checkable QGroupBox, use the \{#indicator-sub}{::indicator} subcontrol
+    and style it exactly like a QCheckBox (i.e)
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 115
+
+    \section2 Customizing QHeaderView
+
+    QHeaderView is customized as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 116
+
+    \section2 Customizing QLineEdit
+
+    The frame of a QLineEdit is styled using the \l{The Box Model}. To
+    create a line edit with rounded corners, we can set:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 117
+
+    The password character of line edits that have QLineEdit::Password
+    echo mode can be set using:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 118
+
+    The background of a read only QLineEdit can be modified as below:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 119
+
+    \section2 Customizing QListView
+
+    The background color of alternating rows can be customized using the following
+    style sheet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 120
+
+    To provide a special background when you hover over items, we can use the
+    \l{item-sub}{::item} subcontrol. For example,
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 121
+
+    \section2 Customizing QMainWindow
+
+    The separator of a QMainWindow can be styled as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 122
+
+    \section2 Customizing QMenu
+    
+    Individual items of a QMenu are styled using the 'item' subcontrol as 
+    follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 123
+
+    For a more advanced customization, use a style sheet as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 124
+
+    \section2 Customizing QMenuBar
+
+    QMenuBar is styled as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 125
+
+    \section2 Customizing QProgressBar
+
+    The QProgressBar's \l{stylesheet-reference.html#border-prop}{border},
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#chunk-sub}{chunk}, and
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#text-align-prop}{text-align} can be customized using
+    style sheets. However, if one property or sub-control is customized,
+    all the other properties or sub-controls must be customized as well.
+
+    \image progressBar-stylesheet.png
+
+    For example, we change the \l{stylesheet-reference.html#border-prop}
+    {border} to grey and the \l{stylesheet-reference.html#chunk-sub}{chunk}
+    to cerulean.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 126
+
+    This leaves the \l{stylesheet-reference.html#text-align-prop}
+    {text-align}, which we customize by positioning the text in the center of
+    the progress bar.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 127
+
+    A \l{stylesheet-reference.html#margin-prop}{margin} can be included to
+    obtain more visible chunks.
+
+    \image progressBar2-stylesheet.png
+
+    In the screenshot above, we use a
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#margin-prop}{margin} of 0.5 pixels.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 128
+
+    \section2 Customizing QPushButton
+
+    A QPushButton is styled as follows:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 129
+
+    For a QPushButton with a menu, use the 
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#menu-indicator-sub}{::menu-indicator} 
+    subcontrol.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 130
+
+    Checkable QPushButton have the \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#checked-ps}
+    {:checked} pseudo state set.
+
+    \section2 Customizing QRadioButton
+
+    The indicator of a QRadioButton can be changed using:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 131
+
+    \section2 Customizing QScrollBar
+
+    The QScrollBar can be styled using its subcontrols like
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#handle-sub}{handle},
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#add-line-sub}{add-line},
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#sub-line-sub}{sub-line}, and so on. Note that
+    if one property or sub-control is customized, all the other properties or
+    sub-controls must be customized as well.
+
+    \image stylesheet-scrollbar1.png
+
+    The scroll bar above has been styled in aquamarine with a solid grey
+    border.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 132
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 133
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 134
+
+    The \l{stylesheet-reference.html#left-arrow-sub}{left-arrow} and
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#right-arrow-sub}{right-arrow} have a solid grey
+    border with a white background. As an alternative, you could also embed the
+    image of an arrow.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 135
+
+    If you want the scroll buttons of the scroll bar to be placed together
+    (instead of the edges) like on Mac OS X, you can use the following
+    stylesheet:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 136
+    
+    The scroll bar using the above stylesheet looks like this:
+        \image stylesheet-scrollbar2.png
+
+
+    To customize a vertical scroll bar use a style sheet similar to the following:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 137
+
+    \section2 Customizing QSizeGrip
+
+    QSizeGrip is usually styled by just setting an image.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 138
+
+    \section2 Customizing QSlider
+
+    You can style horizontal slider as below:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 139
+
+    If you want to change the color of the slider parts before and after the handle, you can use the add-page
+    and sub-page subcontrols. For example, for a vertical slider:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 140
+
+    \section2 Customizing QSpinBox
+
+    QSpinBox can be completely customized as below (the style sheet has commentary inline):
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 141
+
+
+    \section2 Customizing QSplitter
+
+    A QSplitter derives from a QFrame and hence can be styled like a QFrame. 
+    The grip or the handle is customized using the 
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#handle-sub}{::handle} subcontrol.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 142
+
+    \section2 Customizing QStatusBar
+
+    We can provide a background for the status bar and a border for items
+    inside the status bar as follows:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 143
+
+    Note that widgets that have been added to the QStatusBar can be styled
+    using the descendant declaration (i.e)
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 144
+
+    \section2 Customizing QTabWidget and QTabBar
+
+    \image tabWidget-stylesheet1.png
+
+    For the screenshot above, we need a stylesheet as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 145
+
+    Often we require the tabs to overlap to look like below:
+    \image tabWidget-stylesheet2.png
+
+    For a tab widget that looks like above, we make use of 
+    \l{http://www.communitymx.com/content/article.cfm?cid=B0029}
+    {negative margins}. The resulting stylesheet looks like this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 146
+
+    To move the tab bar to the center (as below), we require the following stylesheet:
+    \image tabWidget-stylesheet3.png
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 147
+
+    The tear indicator and the scroll buttons can be further customized as follows:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 148
+
+    \section2 Customizing QTableView
+
+    Suppose we'd like our selected item in QTableView to have bubblegum pink
+    fade to white as its background.
+
+    \image tableWidget-stylesheet.png
+
+    This is possible with the
+    \l{stylesheet-reference.html#selection-background-color-prop}
+    {selection-background-color} property and the syntax required is:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 149
+
+    The corner widget can be customized using the following style sheet
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 150
+
+    \section2 Customizing QToolBar
+    
+    The background and the handle of a QToolBar is customized as below:
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 151
+
+    \section2 Customizing QToolBox
+
+    The tabs of the QToolBox are customized using the 'tab' subcontrol.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 152
+
+    \section2 Customizing QToolButton
+
+    There are three types of QToolButtons.
+    \list
+       \i The QToolButton has no menu. In this case, the QToolButton is styled
+          exactly like QPushButton.  See 
+          \l{#Customizing QPushButton}{Customizing QPushButton} for an
+          example.
+
+       \i The QToolButton has a menu and has the QToolButton::popupMode set to
+          QToolButton::DelayedPopup or QToolButton::InstantPopup. In this case,
+          the QToolButton is styled exactly like a QPushButton with a menu.
+          See \l{#Customizing QPushButton}{Customizing QPushButton} for an
+          example of the usage of the menu-indicator pseudo state.
+
+        \i The QToolButton has its QToolButton::popupMode set to
+           QToolButton::MenuButtonPopup. In this case, we style it as follows:
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 153
+
+
+    \section2 Customizing QToolTip
+
+    QToolTip is customized exactly like a QLabel. In addition, for platforms
+    that support it, the opacity property may be set to adjust the opacity.
+
+    For example,
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 154
+
+    \section2 Customizing QTreeView
+
+    The background color of alternating rows can be customized using the following
+    style sheet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 155
+
+    To provide a special background when you hover over items, we can use the
+    \l{item-sub}{::item} subcontrol. For example,
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 156
+
+    The branches of a QTreeView are styled using the 
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#branch-sub}{::branch} subcontrol. The
+    following stylesheet color codes the various states when drawing
+    a branch.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 157
+    
+    Colorful, though it is, a more useful example can be made using the
+    following images:
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-vline.png
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-branch-more.png
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-branch-end.png
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-branch-closed.png
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-branch-open.png
+    \row
+    \o vline.png
+    \o branch-more.png
+    \o branch-end.png
+    \o branch-closed.png
+    \o branch-open.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_stylesheet.qdoc 158
+
+    The resulting tree view looks like this:
+
+    \image stylesheet-treeview.png
+
+    \sa {Style Sheet Example}, {Supported HTML Subset}, QStyle
+
+
+    \section1 Common mistakes
+
+    This section lists some common mistakes when using stylesheets.
+
+    \section2 QPushButton and images
+
+    When styling a QPushButton, it is often desirable to use an image as the
+    button graphic. It is common to try the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#background-image-prop}{background-image}
+    property,
+    but this has a number of drawbacks: For instance, the background will
+    often appear hidden behind the button decoration, because it is not
+    considered a background. In addition, if the button is resized, the
+    entire background will be stretched or tiled, which does not
+    always look good.
+
+    It is better to use the
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets Reference#border-image-prop}{border-image}
+    property, as it will always display the image,
+    regardless of the background (you can combine it with a background if it
+    has alpha values in it), and it has special settings to deal with button
+    resizing.
+
+    Consider the following snippet:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/stylesheet/common-mistakes.cpp 1
+
+    This will produce a button looking like this:
+
+    \image stylesheet-border-image-normal.png
+
+    The numbers after the url gives the top, right, bottom and left number of
+    pixels, respectively. These numbers correspond to the border and should not
+    stretch when the size changes.
+    Whenever you resize the button, the middle part of the image will stretch
+    in both directions, while the pixels specified in the stylesheet
+    will not. This makes the borders of the button look more natural, like
+    this:
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-border-image-stretched.png
+    \row
+    \o With borders
+    \endtable
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage stylesheet-border-image-wrong.png
+    \row
+    \o Without borders
+    \endtable
+
+    */
diff --git a/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/widgets.qdoc b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/widgets.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0697b94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/widgets.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page widgets-and-layouts.html
+    \title Widgets and Layouts
+
+    \ingroup frameworks-technologies
+
+    \nextpage Widget Classes
+
+    The primary elements for designing user interfaces in Qt are widgets and layouts.
+    
+    \section1 Widgets
+
+    \l{Widget Classes}{Widgets} can display data and status information, receive
+    user input, and provide a container for other widgets that should be grouped
+    together. A widget that is not embedded in a parent widget is called a
+    \l{Application Windows and Dialogs}{window}.
+
+    \image parent-child-widgets.png A parent widget containing various child widgets.
+
+    The QWidget class provides the basic capability to render to the screen, and to
+    handle user input events. All UI elements that Qt provides are either subclasses
+    of QWidget, or are used in connection with a QWidget subclass. Creating custom
+    widgets is done by subclassing QWidget or a suitable subclass and reimplementing
+    the virtual event handlers.
+
+    \section1 Layouts
+
+    \l{Layout Management}{Layouts} are an elegant and flexible way to automatically
+    arrange child widgets within their container. Each widget reports its size requirements
+    to the layout through the \l{QWidget::}{sizeHint} and \l{QWidget::}{sizePolicy}
+    properties, and the layout distributes the available space accordingly.
+
+    \table
+    \row    
+    \o \image qgridlayout-with-5-children.png
+    \o \image qformlayout-with-6-children.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \l{Qt Designer Manual}{\QD} is a powerful tool for interactively creating and
+    arranging widgets in layouts.
+
+    \section1 Widget Styles
+
+    \l{Implementing Styles and Style Aware Widgets}{Styles} draw on behalf of widgets
+    and encapsulate the look and feel of a GUI. Qt's built-in widgets use the QStyle
+    class to perform nearly all of their drawing, ensuring that they look exactly like
+    the equivalent native widgets.
+    
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \image windowsxp-tabwidget.png
+    \o \image plastique-tabwidget.png
+    \o \image macintosh-tabwidget.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \l{Qt Style Sheets} are a powerful mechanism that allows you to customize the
+    appearance of widgets, in addition to what is already possible by subclassing QStyle.
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \page widget-classes.html
+    \title Widget Classes
+
+    \contentspage Widgets and Layouts
+    \nextpage Layout Management
+
+    Below you find a list of all widget classes in Qt. You can also browse the
+    widget classes Qt provides in the various supported styles in the
+    \l{Qt Widget Gallery}.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Basic Widgets
+
+    These basic widgets (controls), such as buttons, comboboxes and scroll bars, are
+    designed for direct use.
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \image windows-label.png
+    \o \image windowsvista-pushbutton.png
+    \o \image gtk-progressbar.png
+    \row
+    \o \image plastique-combobox.png
+    \o \image macintosh-radiobutton.png
+    \o \image cde-lineedit.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \annotatedlist basicwidgets
+
+    \section1 Advanced Widgets
+
+    Advanced GUI widgets such as tab widgets and progress bars provide more
+    complex user interface controls.
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \image windowsxp-treeview.png
+    \o \image gtk-calendarwidget.png
+    \o \image qundoview.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \annotatedlist advanced
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \image windowsvista-tabwidget.png 
+    \o \image macintosh-groupbox.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 Organizer Widgets
+
+    Classes like splitters, tab bars, button groups, etc are used to
+    organize and group GUI primitives into more complex applications or
+    dialogs.
+
+    \annotatedlist organizers
+
+    \section1 Abstract Widget Classes
+
+    Abstract widget classes usable through subclassing. They are generally
+    not usable in themselves, but provide functionality that can be used
+    by inheriting these classes.
+
+    \annotatedlist abstractwidgets
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \group advanced
+    \title Advanced Widgets
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \group abstractwidgets
+    \title Abstract Widget Classes
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \group basicwidgets
+    \title Basic Widgets
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \group organizers
+    \title Organizers
+*/